=================================================================== RCS file: /home/cvs/OpenXM/src/asir-doc/Attic/texinfo.tex,v retrieving revision 1.2 retrieving revision 1.3 diff -u -p -r1.2 -r1.3 --- OpenXM/src/asir-doc/Attic/texinfo.tex 2002/08/13 07:44:05 1.2 +++ OpenXM/src/asir-doc/Attic/texinfo.tex 2017/08/31 01:24:32 1.3 @@ -1,17 +1,19 @@ % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. -% +% % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi % -\def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10} +\def\texinfoversion{2016-08-16.20} % -% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 +% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, +% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, +% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 % Free Software Foundation, Inc. % -% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as -% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at -% your option) any later version. +% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the +% License, or (at your option) any later version. % % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty @@ -19,25 +21,20 @@ % General Public License for more details. % % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write -% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, -% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +% along with this program. If not, see . % -% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. -% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve -% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! +% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing +% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without +% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 +% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). % % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug % reports; you can get the latest version from: -% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex -% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html) -% ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex -% ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex -% (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list). -% /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines. -% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out +% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or +% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or +% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) +% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. -% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/. % % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the @@ -50,14 +47,18 @@ % texindex foo.?? % tex foo.texi % tex foo.texi -% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps. -% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct. +% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. +% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. % -% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get -% the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/. +% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some +% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the +% full Texinfo distribution. +% +% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. + \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} % If in a .fmt file, print the version number @@ -66,7 +67,17 @@ \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} -% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. +% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for +% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. +\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% + +\chardef\other=12 + +% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. +% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. +\let\+ = \relax + +% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. \let\ptexb=\b \let\ptexbullet=\bullet \let\ptexc=\c @@ -76,51 +87,48 @@ \let\ptexend=\end \let\ptexequiv=\equiv \let\ptexexclam=\! +\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote +\let\ptexgtr=> +\let\ptexhat=^ \let\ptexi=\i +\let\ptexindent=\indent +\let\ptexinsert=\insert \let\ptexlbrace=\{ +\let\ptexless=< +\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite +\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent +\let\ptexplus=+ +\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright \let\ptexrbrace=\} +\let\ptexslash=\/ +\let\ptexsp=\sp \let\ptexstar=\* +\let\ptexsup=\sup \let\ptext=\t +\let\ptextop=\top +{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode -% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo. -% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. -\let\+ = \relax - -% (Aug. 17, 1999 A.K.) -% Japanese support. (pTeX is a free Japanese TeX by ASCII corp., Japan, -% and jTeX is a free Japanese TeX by NTT corp. and T. Sakurai) -\newif\ifjaTeX -\newif\ifpTeX -\ifx\kanjiskip\undefined\else - \pTeXtrue - \jaTeXtrue -\fi -\newif\ifjTeX -\ifx\jkern\undefined\else - \jTeXtrue - \jaTeXtrue -\fi - -\message{Basics,} -\ifpTeX -\message{ASCII-pTeX,} -\fi -\ifjTeX -\message{NTT-jTeX,} -\fi -\chardef\other=12 - % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it % starts a new line in the output. \newlinechar = `^^J +% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error +% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. +% +\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined + \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. +\else + \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} +\fi + % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi +\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi -\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi -\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi +\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi +\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi @@ -152,46 +160,87 @@ \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi -\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi -\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi +% Give the space character the catcode for a space. +\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} + +\chardef\dashChar = `\- +\chardef\slashChar = `\/ +\chardef\underChar = `\_ + % Ignore a token. % \def\gobble#1{} -\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} -\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} -\hyphenation{eshell} -\hyphenation{white-space} +% The following is used inside several \edef's. +\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} -% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. -\newdimen \bindingoffset -\newdimen \normaloffset -\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight +% Hyphenation fixes. +\hyphenation{ + Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script + ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps + data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script + man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm + par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces + spell-ing spell-ings + stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space + wide-spread wrap-around +} % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, -% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. +% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make +% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log +% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. % \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% -\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined -\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 - \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 - \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 - \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen +\def\loggingall{% + \tracingstats2 + \tracingpages1 + \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex + \tracingparagraphs1 + \tracingoutput1 + \tracingmacros2 + \tracingrestores1 + \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen + \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging + \tracingscantokens1 + \tracingifs1 + \tracinggroups1 + \tracingnesting2 + \tracingassigns1 + \fi + \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex + \errorcontextlines16 }% -\else -\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2 - \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 - \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 - \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1 - \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 - \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen -}% -\fi -% For @cropmarks command. +% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things +% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, +% after all. +% +\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} +\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} + +% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing +% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. +% +\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} +\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} +\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} + +% Output routine +% + +% For a final copy, take out the rectangles +% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided +% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). +% +\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } + % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. % \newif\ifcropmarks @@ -205,36 +254,135 @@ \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in +% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. +% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. +% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. +% +% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. +% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. +% +% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter +% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top +% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. + +% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one +% mark before the section break, and one after. +% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs, +% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs. +% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous +% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section +% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. +% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. +% +% See page 260 of The TeXbook. +\def\domark{% + \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% + \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% + \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% + \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% + \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% + \mark{% + \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top + \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom + \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks + }% +} + +% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, +% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. +% +% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title +% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us +% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., +% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very +% first @chapter. +\def\gettopheadingmarks{% + \ifcase0\topmark\fi + \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi +} +\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} +\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} + +% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. +\def\lastchapterdefs{} +\def\lastsectiondefs{} +\def\lastsection{} +\def\prevchapterdefs{} +\def\prevsectiondefs{} +\def\lastcolordefs{} + +% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. +\newdimen\bindingoffset +\newdimen\normaloffset +\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight + % Main output routine. +% \chardef\PAGE = 255 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} \newbox\headlinebox \newbox\footlinebox -% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents -% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. +% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. +% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer, +% cropmarks, and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page +% to be written to the auxiliary files. +% \def\onepageout#1{% \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi % \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi % + % Common context changes for both heading and footing. % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). - \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% - \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% + \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} % + % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, + % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the + % values in \headline and \footline. + % + % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. + \ifcase1\topmark\fi + \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername + \ifcase0\firstmark\fi + \let\curchaptername\thischaptername + % + \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi + \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi + % + \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername + \let\thischapterheading\thischapter + \else + % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank + % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name + % being shown twice. + \def\thischapterheading{}% + \fi + % + \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% + \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% + % {% + % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends % before the \shipout runs. % - \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if - % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. + % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. + % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: + % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} + % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; + % it needs to be + % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} \shipout\vbox{% + % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. + \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi + % \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup \hsize = \outerhsize \vskip-\topandbottommargin @@ -258,14 +406,12 @@ \pagebody{#1}% \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. - % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) + % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. - \vskip 2\baselineskip + \vskip 24pt \unvbox\footlinebox \fi % - \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi - % \ifcropmarks \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup @@ -283,20 +429,21 @@ \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause \fi }% end of \shipout\vbox - }% end of group with \turnoffactive + }% end of group with \indexdummies \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi } \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen -\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} +% Main part of page, including any footnotes +\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} {\catcode`\@ =11 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi -\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 +\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} } @@ -312,200 +459,171 @@ \def\nsbot{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} + +% Argument parsing + % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. +% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. % -\def\parsearg#1{% - \let\next = #1% +\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} +\def\parseargusing#1#2{% + \def\argtorun{#2}% \begingroup \obeylines - \futurelet\temp\parseargx + \spaceisspace + #1% + \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. } -% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or -% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done. -\def\parseargx{% - % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. - \ifx\obeyedspace\temp - \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace - \else - \expandafter\parseargline - \fi -} - -% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). -{\obeyspaces % - \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} - {\obeylines % \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. - % - % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. - % Result of each macro is put in \toks0. - \argremovec #1\c\relax % - \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % - % - % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. - \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% + \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% }% } -% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX -% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call -% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is -% just to delimit the argument to the \c. -\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} -\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} +% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc +% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. +\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} +\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} +\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} -% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., +% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `\^^M' is replaced by a single space. +% +% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., % @end itemize @c foo -% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the -% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the -% result to \toks0. +% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed +% by \finishparsearg. % -% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces -% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. -% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever -% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed -% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of -% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument -% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. -% -\def\removeactivespaces#1{% - \begingroup - \ignoreactivespaces - \edef\temp{#1}% - \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% - \endgroup +\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} +\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} +\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% + \def\temp{#3}% + \ifx\temp\empty + % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: + \let\temp\finishparsearg + \else + \let\temp\argcheckspaces + \fi + % Put the space token in: + \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm } -% Change the active space to expand to nothing. +% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so +% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. +% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, +% just before passing the control to \argtorun. +% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is +% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger +% that a pair of braces would be stripped. % -\begingroup +% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. +% +\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} + + +% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line +% +% \parseargdef\foo{...} +% is roughly equivalent to +% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} +% \def\Xfoo#1{...} +\def\parseargdef#1{% + \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% +} +\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% + \def#2{\parsearg#1}% + \def#1##1% +} + +% Several utility definitions with active space: +{ \obeyspaces - \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} -\endgroup + \gdef\obeyedspace{ } + % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword + % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this + % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input + % should produce a line of output anyway. + % + \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} + % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces + % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the + % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). + \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} +} + + \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} -%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away -%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) -\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} -\def\ENVcheck{% -\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} -\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage +% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: +% +% \envdef\foo{...} +% \def\Efoo{...} +% +% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the +% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also +% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks +% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be +% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. +% +% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they +% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The +% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this +% special case.) -% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. -\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} -\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} +% At run-time, environments start with this: +\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} +% initialize +\let\thisenv\empty -\def\beginxxx #1{% -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax -{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else -\csname #1\endcsname\fi} +% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': +\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} +\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} -% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. -% -\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} -\def\endxxx #1{% - \removeactivespaces{#1}% - \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% - % - \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax - % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. - \errhelp = \EMsimple - \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% - \else - \unmatchedenderror\endthing - \fi +% Check whether we're in the right environment: +\def\checkenv#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\thisenv\temp \else - % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. - \csname E\endthing\endcsname + \badenverr \fi } -% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error. -% -\def\unmatchedenderror#1{% +% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: +\def\badenverr{% \errhelp = \EMsimple - \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% + \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, + not \inenvironment\thisenv}% } +\def\inenvironment#1{% + \ifx#1\empty + outside of any environment% + \else + in environment \expandafter\string#1% + \fi +} -% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. +% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. +% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv % -\def\defineunmatchedend#1{% - \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% +\parseargdef\end{% + \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname + \else + % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. + \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname + \csname E#1\endcsname + \endgroup + \fi } +\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} -% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in -% \nonfillstart and \quotations). -\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt -\def\singlespace{% - % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below - % environments. --karl, 6may93 - %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip - %\kern \baselineskip}% - \setleading \singlespaceskip -} -%% Simple single-character @ commands - -% @@ prints an @ -% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). -\def\@{{\tt\char64}} - -% This is turned off because it was never documented -% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. -%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' -%% but suppressing ligatures. -%\def\`{{`}} -%\def\'{{'}} - -% Used to generate quoted braces. -\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} -\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} -\let\{=\mylbrace -\let\}=\myrbrace -\begingroup - % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index. - \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12 - \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 - \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12 - @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]% - @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]% -@endgroup - -% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent -% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H. -\let\, = \c -\let\dotaccent = \. -\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} -\let\tieaccent = \t -\let\ubaraccent = \b -\let\udotaccent = \d - -% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown -% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss. -\def\questiondown{?`} -\def\exclamdown{!`} - -% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. -\def\imacro{i} -\def\jmacro{j} -\def\dotless#1{% - \def\temp{#1}% - \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi - \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j - \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% - \fi\fi -} - % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and @@ -522,17 +640,35 @@ \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } % @* forces a line break. -\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} +\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} +% @/ allows a line break. +\let\/=\allowbreak + % @. is an end-of-sentence period. -\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } +\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. -\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } +\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} % @? is an end-of-sentence query. -\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } +\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} +% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. +% +\def\onword{on} +\def\offword{off} +% +\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing + \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% + \fi\fi +} + % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. @@ -546,47 +682,24 @@ % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and % the text is small, which looks bad. % -\def\group{\begingroup - \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else +% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can +% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it +% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an +% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The +% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit +% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). +% +\newbox\groupbox +\def\vfilllimit{0.7} +% +\envdef\group{% + \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% \fi + \startsavinginserts % - % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large - % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the - % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of - % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space - % above. But it's pretty close. - \def\Egroup{% - \egroup % End the \vtop. - \endgroup % End the \group. - }% - % - \vtop\bgroup - % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in - % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. - % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group - % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the - % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. - % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. - \everypar = {\strut}% - % - % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's - % normal interline spacing. - \offinterlineskip - % - % OK, but now we have to do something about blank - % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally - % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've - % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an - % empty paragraph. - \ifx\par\lisppar - \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% - % - % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. - \obeylines - \fi - % + \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after @@ -596,6 +709,37 @@ \comment } % +% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts +% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) +% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space +% above. But it's pretty close. +\def\Egroup{% + % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group + % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. + \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. + \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth + \egroup % End the \vtop. + \addgroupbox + \prevdepth = \dimen1 + \checkinserts +} + +\def\addgroupbox{ + % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. + \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox + % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). + \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal + % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big + % group, force a page break. + \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 + \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight + \page + \fi + \fi + \box\groupbox +} + +% % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. % @@ -608,18 +752,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in -\def\need{\parsearg\needx} - -% Old definition--didn't work. -%\def\needx #1{\par % -%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally -%% if the depth of the box does not fit. -%{\baselineskip=0pt% -%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak -%\prevdepth=-1000pt -%}} - -\def\needx#1{% +\parseargdef\need{% % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a % paragraph. \par @@ -658,38 +791,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \fi } -% @br forces paragraph break +% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). \let\br = \par -% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. -% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter -% font as three actual period characters. +% @page forces the start of a new page. % -\def\dots{% - \leavevmode - \hbox to 1.5em{% - \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil - .\hss.\hss.% - \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil - }% -} - -% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. -% -\def\enddots{% - \leavevmode - \hbox to 2em{% - \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil - .\hss.\hss.\hss.% - \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil - }% - \spacefactor=3000 -} - - -% @page forces the start of a new page -% \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} % @exdent text.... @@ -700,78 +807,204 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \newskip\exdentamount % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. -\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} -\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} +\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. -\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} -\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount -\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} +\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount + \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} -% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph. - -\def\inmargin#1{% -\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth - \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss - \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}} +% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current +% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion +% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. +% \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} +% +\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% + \nobreak + \kern-\strutdepth + \vtop to \strutdepth{% + \baselineskip=\strutdepth + \vss + % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to + % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. + \ifx#1l% + \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% + \else + \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% + \fi + \null + }% +}} +\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} +\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} +% +% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} +% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; +% else use TEXT for both). +% +\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} +\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt + \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts + \def\righttext{#2}% + \else + \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text + \def\righttext{#1}% + \fi + % + \ifodd\pageno + \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin + \else + \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% + \fi + \temp +} -%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} +% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should +% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the +% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would +% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main +% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command +% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work. +% +\def\|{% + % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. + \leavevmode + % + % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. + \vadjust{% + % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current + % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. + \vskip-\baselineskip + % + % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So + % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. + \llap{% + % + % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. + \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt + % + % This is the space between the bar and the text. + \hskip 12pt + }% + }% +} -% @include file insert text of that file as input. -% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name). -\def\include{\begingroup - \catcode`\\=12 - \catcode`~=12 - \catcode`^=12 - \catcode`_=12 - \catcode`|=12 - \catcode`<=12 - \catcode`>=12 - \catcode`+=12 - \parsearg\includezzz} -% Restore active chars for included file. -\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup - % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work. +% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. +% +\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} +\def\includezzz#1{% + \pushthisfilestack \def\thisfile{#1}% - \input\thisfile -\endgroup} + {% + \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. + \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion + \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. + \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% + \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% + % + % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes + % definitions, etc. + \expandafter + }\temp + \popthisfilestack +} +\def\filenamecatcodes{% + \catcode`\\=\other + \catcode`~=\other + \catcode`^=\other + \catcode`_=\other + \catcode`|=\other + \catcode`<=\other + \catcode`>=\other + \catcode`+=\other + \catcode`-=\other + \catcode`\`=\other + \catcode`\'=\other +} +\def\pushthisfilestack{% + \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm +} +\def\pushthisfilestackX{% + \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm +} +\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% + \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% +} + +\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} +\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: + the stack of filenames is empty.}} +% \def\thisfile{} -% @center line outputs that line, centered +% @center line +% outputs that line, centered. +% +\parseargdef\center{% + \ifhmode + \let\centersub\centerH + \else + \let\centersub\centerV + \fi + \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% + \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case +} +\def\centerH#1{{% + \hfil\break + \advance\hsize by -\leftskip + \advance\hsize by -\rightskip + \line{#1}% + \break +}} +% +\newcount\centerpenalty +\def\centerV#1{% + % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if + % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe + % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still + % prevent a page break here. + \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty + \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi + \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi + \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% +} -\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} -\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip -\advance\hsize by -\rightskip -\centerline{#1}}} - % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space +% +\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} -\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} -\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} - % @comment ...line which is ignored... % @c is the same as @comment % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment +% +\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% +\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other\commentxxx}% -\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% +{\catcode`\^^M=\active% +\gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup% +\futurelet\nexttoken\commentxxxx}% +\gdef\commentxxxx{\ifx\nexttoken\aftermacro\expandafter\comment\fi}% +} + +\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% -\commentxxx} -{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} +\cxxx} +{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} +% See comment in \scanmacro about why the definitions of @c and @comment differ -\let\c=\comment - % @paragraphindent NCHARS % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. -% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though. -% +% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. +% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. +% \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords \def\noneword{none} % -\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent} -\def\doparagraphindent#1{% +\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else @@ -788,8 +1021,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. -\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent} -\def\doexampleindent#1{% +\parseargdef\exampleindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else @@ -801,70 +1033,56 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \fi } -% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. +% @firstparagraphindent WORD +% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph +% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such +% paragraphs. % -\def\asis#1{#1} +% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling +% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. +% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. +% By default, we suppress indentation. +% +\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} +\def\insertword{insert} +% +\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\noneword + \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent + \else\ifx\temp\insertword + \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% + \fi\fi +} -% @math means output in math mode. -% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control -% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, -% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they -% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a -% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. +% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to +% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. % -% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it -% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. +% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next +% paragraph. % -\let\implicitmath = $ -\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} +\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% + \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% + \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% + \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% +} +% +\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% + \global\let\indent = \ptexindent + \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent + \global\everypar = {}% +} -% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. -\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} -\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} % @refill is a no-op. \let\refill=\relax -% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to -% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. -% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). -% -\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. -\let\novalidate = \linksfalse +% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored +\let\setfilename=\comment -% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. -% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. -% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. -\def\setfilename{% - \iflinks - \readauxfile - \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. - \openindices - \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. - \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. - % - % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. - % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. - % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input. - \openin 1 texinfo.cnf - \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi - \closein1 - \temp - % - \comment % Ignore the actual filename. -} - -% Called from \setfilename. -% -\def\openindices{% - \newindex{cp}% - \newcodeindex{fn}% - \newcodeindex{vr}% - \newcodeindex{tp}% - \newcodeindex{ky}% - \newcodeindex{pg}% -} - % @bye. \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} @@ -881,148 +1099,479 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \newtoks\toksC \newtoks\toksD \newbox\boxA +\newbox\boxB \newcount\countA \newif\ifpdf \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest -\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined - \pdffalse - \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble - \let\pdfurl = \gobble - \let\endlink = \relax - \let\linkcolor = \relax - \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax +% +% For LuaTeX +% + +\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname +\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. + +\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined \else - \pdftrue - \pdfoutput = 1 - \input pdfcolor + % Use Unicode destination names + \txiuseunicodedestnametrue + % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 + \begingroup + \catcode`\%=12 + \directlua{ + function UTF16oct(str) + tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') + for c in string.utfvalues(str) do + if c < 0x10000 then + tex.sprint( + string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. + string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', + (c / 256), (c % 256))) + else + c = c - 0x10000 + local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 + local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 + tex.sprint( + string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. + string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. + string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. + string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', + (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), + (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) + end + end + end + } + \endgroup + \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} + % Escape PDF strings without converting + \begingroup + \directlua{ + function PDFescstr(str) + for c in string.bytes(str) do + if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then + tex.sprint( + string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', + c)) + else + tex.sprint(string.char(c)) + end + end + end + } + \endgroup + \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} + \ifnum\luatexversion>84 + % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 + \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} + \let\pdfoutput\outputmode + \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} + \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} + \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} + \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource + \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource + \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex + \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} + \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} + \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} + \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} + \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} + \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} + \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth + \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight + \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} + \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} + \fi +\fi + +% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 +% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. +\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined +\else + \ifx\pdfoutput\relax + \else + \ifcase\pdfoutput + \else + \pdftrue + \fi + \fi +\fi + +% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, +% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to +% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be +% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. +% +% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and +% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user +% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so +% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to +% do this reliably, so we use it. + +% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, +% which we \xdef. +\def\txiescapepdf#1{% + \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined + % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? + % Many times it won't matter. + \xdef#1{#1}% + \else + % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, + % backslashes, and other special chars. + \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% + \fi +} +\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% + \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined + % No UTF-16 converting macro available. + \txiescapepdf{#1}% + \else + \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% + \fi +} + +\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images +with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot +be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI +output) for that.)} + +\ifpdf + % + % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, + % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a + % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead + % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as + % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use + % black by default, though. + \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} + \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} + % + % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); + % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). + \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} + % + % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, + % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. + \def\setcolor#1{% + \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% + \domark + \pdfsetcolor{#1}% + } + % + \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} + \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} + \def\lastcolordefs{} + % + \def\makefootline{% + \baselineskip24pt + \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% + } + % + \def\makeheadline{% + \vbox to 0pt{% + \vskip-22.5pt + \line{% + \vbox to8.5pt{}% + % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. + \getcolormarks + % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% + }% + \vss + }% + \nointerlineskip + } + % + % + \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} + % + % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% - \def\imagewidth{#2}% - \def\imageheight{#3}% + \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% + % + % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among + % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if + % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a + % bitmap. + \let\pdfimgext=\empty + \begingroup + \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 + \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp + \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% + \fi + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% + \fi + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% + \fi + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% + \fi + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% + \fi + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% + \fi + \closein 1 + \endgroup + % + % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is + % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 - \pdfimage + \immediate\pdfimage \else - \pdfximage + \immediate\pdfximage \fi - \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi - \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi - {#1.pdf}% + \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi + \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi + \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 + #1.\pdfimgext + \else + {#1.\pdfimgext}% + \fi \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage \fi} - \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz} - \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@} -% \let\linkcolor = \Cyan - \let\linkcolor = \Green - \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} + % + \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% + % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters + % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. + \indexnofonts + \makevalueexpandable + \turnoffactive + \iftxiuseunicodedestname + \ifx \declaredencoding \latone + % Pass through Latin-1 characters. + % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. + \else + \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight + % Pass through Unicode characters. + \else + % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. + \passthroughcharsfalse + \fi + \fi + \else + % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. + \passthroughcharsfalse + \fi + \def\pdfdestname{#1}% + \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname + }} + % + \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% + \indexnofonts + \makevalueexpandable + \turnoffactive + \ifx \declaredencoding \latone + % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark + % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for + % the "PDFDocEncoding". + \passthroughcharstrue + % Pass through Latin-1 characters. + % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode + % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding + \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% + \else + \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight + \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined + % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. + % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, + % but the code for this isn't done yet. + % Use ASCII approximations. + \passthroughcharsfalse + \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% + \else + % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. + % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. + \passthroughcharstrue + \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% + \fi + \else + % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. + % Use ASCII approximations. + \passthroughcharsfalse + \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% + \fi + \fi + % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 + % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding + \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext + }} + % + \def\pdfmkdest#1{% + \setpdfdestname{#1}% + \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% + } + % + % used to mark target names; must be expandable. + \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} + % + % by default, use black for everything. + \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} + \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} + \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} + % % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines % come from Petr Olsak \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax - \advance\tempnum by1 + \advance\tempnum by 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} - \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{% - \openin 1 \jobname.toc - \ifeof 1\else\bgroup - \closein 1 - \indexnofonts - \def\tt{} - % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks - \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace - \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace - % - \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{} - \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{} - \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}} - \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} - \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}} - \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} - \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}} - \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} - \input \jobname.toc - \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}} - \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} - \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}} - \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} - \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}} - \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} - \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}} - \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{% - \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} - \input \jobname.toc - \egroup\fi - }} - \def\makelinks #1,{% - \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% - \ifx\params\E - \let\nextmakelinks=\relax - \else - \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks - \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi - \picknum{#1}% - \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} - goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% - \linkcolor #1% - \advance\lnkcount by 1% - \endlink + % + % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the + % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number + % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, + % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. + % #4 is the page number + % + \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% + % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the + % page number. We could generate a destination for the section + % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't + % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. + \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} + \setpdfdestname{#3} + \ifx\pdfdestname\empty + \def\pdfdestname{#4}% \fi - \nextmakelinks + % + \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% } - \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} - \def\pn#1{% - \def\p{#1}% - \ifx\p\lbrace - \let\nextpn=\ppn - \else - \let\nextpn=\ppnn - \def\first{#1} - \fi - \nextpn + % + \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% + \begingroup + % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. + \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines + \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% + \def\thischapnum{##2}% + \def\thissecnum{0}% + \def\thissubsecnum{0}% + }% + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% + \def\thissecnum{##2}% + \def\thissubsecnum{0}% + }% + \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% + \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% + }% + \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% + }% + \def\thischapnum{0}% + \def\thissecnum{0}% + \def\thissubsecnum{0}% + % + % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et + % al. a second time, below. + \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% + \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% + \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% + \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% + \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% + \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% + \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% + \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% + \readdatafile{toc}% + % + % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. + % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of + % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. + % + % We use the node names as the destinations. + \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero + \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% + % + % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of + % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, + % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from + % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from + % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. + % + % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to + % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too + % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents + % we use for the index sort strings. + % + \indexnofonts + \setupdatafile + % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike + % Texinfo index files. So set that up. + \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% + \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% + \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash + \input \tocreadfilename + \endgroup } - \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} - \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} - \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} - \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} + {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 + \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other + \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% + \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% + ] + % \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces - \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% - \advance\filenamelength by 1 - \fi + \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% + \advance\filenamelength by 1 \fi \nextsp} - \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} + \def\getfilename#1{% + \filenamelength=0 + % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get + % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". + \edef\temp{#1}% + \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax + } \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink \else \let \startlink \pdfstartlink \fi + % make a live url in pdf output. \def\pdfurl#1{% \begingroup - \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% - \leavevmode\Red + % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not + % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context + % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one + % people have actually reported a problem with. + % + \normalturnoffactive + \def\@{@}% + \let\/=\empty + \makevalueexpandable + % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just + % special-casing \var here? + \def\var##1{##1}% + % + \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% - % #1 \endgroup} \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} \def\maketoks{% - \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS| + \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax \ifx\first0\adn0 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 - \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 + \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 \else \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else @@ -1035,59 +1584,654 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} \def\pdflink#1{% - \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}} - \linkcolor #1\endlink} - \def\mkpgn#1{#1@} + \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} + \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} -\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput +\else + % non-pdf mode + \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble + \let\pdfurl = \gobble + \let\endlink = \relax + \let\setcolor = \gobble + \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble + \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax +\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput +% +% For XeTeX +% +\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined +\else + % + % XeTeX version check + % + \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 + % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. + % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). + % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special + % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. + \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} + % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. + % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. + \txiuseunicodedestnametrue + \else + % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the + % `dvipdfmx:config' special. + % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, + % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. + % + % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF + % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. + % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). + \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse + \fi + % + % Color support + % + \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} + \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} + % + \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} + % + % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, + % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. + \def\setcolor#1{% + \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% + \domark + \pdfsetcolor{#1}% + } + % + \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} + \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} + \def\lastcolordefs{} + % + \def\makefootline{% + \baselineskip24pt + \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% + } + % + \def\makeheadline{% + \vbox to 0pt{% + \vskip-22.5pt + \line{% + \vbox to8.5pt{}% + % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. + \getcolormarks + % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% + }% + \vss + }% + \nointerlineskip + } + % + % PDF outline support + % + % Emulate pdfTeX primitive + \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% + \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% + } + % + \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% + % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters + % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. + \indexnofonts + \makevalueexpandable + \turnoffactive + \iftxiuseunicodedestname + % Pass through Unicode characters. + \else + % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. + \passthroughcharsfalse + \fi + \def\pdfdestname{#1}% + \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname + }} + % + \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% + \turnoffactive + % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. + \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% + % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. + % So we do not convert. + \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext + }} + % + \def\pdfmkdest#1{% + \setpdfdestname{#1}% + \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% + } + % + % by default, use black for everything. + \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} + \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} + \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} + % + \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% + \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} + \setpdfdestname{#3} + \ifx\pdfdestname\empty + \def\pdfdestname{#4}% + \fi + % + \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A + << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% + } + % + \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% + \begingroup + % + % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. + % Therefore, we read toc only once. + % + % We use node names as destinations. + \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines + \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% + \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% + \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% + % + \let\appentry\numchapentry% + \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% + \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% + \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% + \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% + \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% + \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% + \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% + % + % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. + % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. + % + \indexnofonts + \setupdatafile + % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike + % Texinfo index files. So set that up. + \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% + \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% + \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash + \input \tocreadfilename + \endgroup + } + {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 + \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other + \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% + \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% + ] + \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } + % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary + % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. + % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, + % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. + % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). +% + \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% + \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax + \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces + \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% + \advance\filenamelength by 1 + \fi + \nextsp} + \def\getfilename#1{% + \filenamelength=0 + % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get + % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". + \edef\temp{#1}% + \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax + } + % make a live url in pdf output. + \def\pdfurl#1{% + \begingroup + % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not + % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context + % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one + % people have actually reported a problem with. + % + \normalturnoffactive + \def\@{@}% + \let\/=\empty + \makevalueexpandable + % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just + % special-casing \var here? + \def\var##1{##1}% + % + \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% + \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] + /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% + \endgroup} + \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} + \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} + \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} + \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} + \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} + \def\maketoks{% + \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax + \ifx\first0\adn0 + \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 + \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 + \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 + \else + \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi + \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else + \let\next=\maketoks + \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} + \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi + \fi + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \next} + \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% + {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} + \def\pdflink#1{% + \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] + /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% + \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} + \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} +% + % + % @image support + % + % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). + \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% + \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% + % + % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among + % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if + % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a + % bitmap. + \let\xeteximgext=\empty + \begingroup + \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 + \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 + \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% + \fi + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% + \fi + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% + \fi + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% + \fi + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% + \fi + \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% + \fi + \closein 1 + \endgroup + % + \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% + \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext + \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" + \else + \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% + \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext + \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" + \else + \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" + \fi + \fi + \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi + \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax + } +\fi + \message{fonts,} -% Font-change commands. -% Japanese fonts. -\newfam\mcfam -\newfam\gtfam -\ifjaTeX -\catcode`\@ =11 -\def\mc{\fam\mcfam \tenmin} -\def\gt{\fam\gtfam \tengt} -\def\rm{\mc \fam\z@ \tenrm} -\def\bf{\gt \fam\bffam \tenbf} -\catcode`\@ =12 -\fi +% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. +% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in +% italics, not bold italics. +% +\def\setfontstyle#1{% + \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. + \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font +} +% Select #1 fonts with the current style. +% +\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} + +\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} +\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} +\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} +\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} +\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} + +% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since +% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. +\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} + % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. -% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. +% So we set up a \sf. \newfam\sffam -\ifjaTeX -\def\sf{\gt \fam\sffam \tensf} -\else -\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} -\fi +\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. -% We don't need math for this one. -\def\ttsl{\tenttsl} +% We don't need math for this font style. +\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} -% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt). -\newcount\mainmagstep -\mainmagstep=\magstephalf -% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the -% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). -% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor -\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} +% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size +% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers +% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. +% +\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} +\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} +\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} +% +% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. +\def\baselinefactor{1} +% +\newdimen\textleading +\def\setleading#1{% + \dimen0 = #1\relax + \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 + \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip + \normalbaselines + \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% + \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip + depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip + }% +} +% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. +% +% do nothing with this by default. +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble + +% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. +% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run +% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) +\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else + \begingroup + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) +%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) +%%Version: 1.000 +%%EndComments +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin +12 dict begin +begincmap +/CIDSystemInfo +<< /Registry (TeX) +/Ordering (OT1) +/Supplement 0 +>> def +/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def +/CMapType 2 def +1 begincodespacerange +<00> <7F> +endcodespacerange +8 beginbfrange +<00> <01> <0393> +<09> <0A> <03A8> +<23> <26> <0023> +<28> <3B> <0028> +<3F> <5B> <003F> +<5D> <5E> <005D> +<61> <7A> <0061> +<7B> <7C> <2013> +endbfrange +40 beginbfchar +<02> <0398> +<03> <039B> +<04> <039E> +<05> <03A0> +<06> <03A3> +<07> <03D2> +<08> <03A6> +<0B> <00660066> +<0C> <00660069> +<0D> <0066006C> +<0E> <006600660069> +<0F> <00660066006C> +<10> <0131> +<11> <0237> +<12> <0060> +<13> <00B4> +<14> <02C7> +<15> <02D8> +<16> <00AF> +<17> <02DA> +<18> <00B8> +<19> <00DF> +<1A> <00E6> +<1B> <0153> +<1C> <00F8> +<1D> <00C6> +<1E> <0152> +<1F> <00D8> +<21> <0021> +<22> <201D> +<27> <2019> +<3C> <00A1> +<3D> <003D> +<3E> <00BF> +<5C> <201C> +<5F> <02D9> +<60> <2018> +<7D> <02DD> +<7E> <007E> +<7F> <00A8> +endbfchar +endcmap +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop +end +end +%%EndResource +%%EOF + }\endgroup + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% + }% +% +% \cmapOT1IT + \begingroup + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) +%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) +%%Version: 1.000 +%%EndComments +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin +12 dict begin +begincmap +/CIDSystemInfo +<< /Registry (TeX) +/Ordering (OT1IT) +/Supplement 0 +>> def +/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def +/CMapType 2 def +1 begincodespacerange +<00> <7F> +endcodespacerange +8 beginbfrange +<00> <01> <0393> +<09> <0A> <03A8> +<25> <26> <0025> +<28> <3B> <0028> +<3F> <5B> <003F> +<5D> <5E> <005D> +<61> <7A> <0061> +<7B> <7C> <2013> +endbfrange +42 beginbfchar +<02> <0398> +<03> <039B> +<04> <039E> +<05> <03A0> +<06> <03A3> +<07> <03D2> +<08> <03A6> +<0B> <00660066> +<0C> <00660069> +<0D> <0066006C> +<0E> <006600660069> +<0F> <00660066006C> +<10> <0131> +<11> <0237> +<12> <0060> +<13> <00B4> +<14> <02C7> +<15> <02D8> +<16> <00AF> +<17> <02DA> +<18> <00B8> +<19> <00DF> +<1A> <00E6> +<1B> <0153> +<1C> <00F8> +<1D> <00C6> +<1E> <0152> +<1F> <00D8> +<21> <0021> +<22> <201D> +<23> <0023> +<24> <00A3> +<27> <2019> +<3C> <00A1> +<3D> <003D> +<3E> <00BF> +<5C> <201C> +<5F> <02D9> +<60> <2018> +<7D> <02DD> +<7E> <007E> +<7F> <00A8> +endbfchar +endcmap +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop +end +end +%%EndResource +%%EOF + }\endgroup + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% + }% +% +% \cmapOT1TT + \begingroup + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) +%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) +%%Version: 1.000 +%%EndComments +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin +12 dict begin +begincmap +/CIDSystemInfo +<< /Registry (TeX) +/Ordering (OT1TT) +/Supplement 0 +>> def +/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def +/CMapType 2 def +1 begincodespacerange +<00> <7F> +endcodespacerange +5 beginbfrange +<00> <01> <0393> +<09> <0A> <03A8> +<21> <26> <0021> +<28> <5F> <0028> +<61> <7E> <0061> +endbfrange +32 beginbfchar +<02> <0398> +<03> <039B> +<04> <039E> +<05> <03A0> +<06> <03A3> +<07> <03D2> +<08> <03A6> +<0B> <2191> +<0C> <2193> +<0D> <0027> +<0E> <00A1> +<0F> <00BF> +<10> <0131> +<11> <0237> +<12> <0060> +<13> <00B4> +<14> <02C7> +<15> <02D8> +<16> <00AF> +<17> <02DA> +<18> <00B8> +<19> <00DF> +<1A> <00E6> +<1B> <0153> +<1C> <00F8> +<1D> <00C6> +<1E> <0152> +<1F> <00D8> +<20> <2423> +<27> <2019> +<60> <2018> +<7F> <00A8> +endbfchar +endcmap +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop +end +end +%%EndResource +%%EOF + }\endgroup + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% + }% +\fi\fi + + +% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. +% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap +% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). +% Example: +% #1 = \textrm +% #2 = \rmshape +% #3 = 10 +% #4 = \mainmagstep +% #5 = OT1 +% +\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% + \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 + \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% +} +% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. +\let\cmap\gobble +% +% (end of cmaps) + % Use cm as the default font prefix. % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix % before you read in texinfo.tex. -\ifx\fontprefix\undefined +\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined \def\fontprefix{cm} \fi % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. \def\rmshape{r} -\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold +\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold \def\bfshape{b} \def\bxshape{bx} \def\ttshape{tt} @@ -1102,346 +2246,622 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\scshape{csc} \def\scbshape{csc} -\ifx\bigger\relax -\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 -\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} -\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} -\ifpTeX -\font\textmc=min10 scaled 1200 -\font\textgt=goth10 scaled 1200 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\textmc=dm12 -\jfont\textgt=dg12 -\fi -\else -\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\ifpTeX -\font\textmc=min10 scaled \magstephalf -\font\textgt=goth10 scaled \magstephalf -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\textmc=dm10 scaled \magstephalf -\jfont\textgt=dg10 scaled \magstephalf -\fi -\fi -% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. -% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 -% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. -\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} -\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) +% +\def\definetextfontsizexi{% +% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). +\def\textnominalsize{11pt} +\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} +\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} +\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep +\def\textecsize{1095} -% A few fonts for @defun, etc. -\ifpTeX -\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 -\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} -\font\defmc=min10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\defgt=goth10 scaled \magstep1 -\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenmin=\defmc -\let\tengt=\defgt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} -\else\ifjTeX -\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 -\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} -\jfont\defmc=dm10 scaled \magstep1 -\jfont\defgt=dg10 scaled \magstep1 -\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenmin=\defmc -\let\tengt=\defgt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} -\else -\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 -\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} -\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} -\fi\fi +% A few fonts for @defun names and args. +\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf +\let\tenttsl=\defttsl \let\tensl=\defsl \bf} % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). -\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} -\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} -\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} -\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} -\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} -\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} -\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} -\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} +\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} +\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} \font\smalli=cmmi9 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 -\ifpTeX -\font\smallmc=min9 -\font\smallgt=goth9 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\smallmc=dm9 -\jfont\smallgt=dg9 -\fi +\def\smallecsize{0900} -% Fonts for title page: -\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} -\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} -\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} -\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} -\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} -\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} -\ifpTeX -\font\titlemc=min10 scaled \magstep4 -\font\titlegt=goth10 scaled \magstep4 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\titlemc=dm10 scaled \magstep4 -\jfont\titlegt=dg10 scaled \magstep4 -\fi +% Fonts for small examples (8pt). +\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} +\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} +\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} +\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} +\font\smalleri=cmmi8 +\font\smallersy=cmsy8 +\def\smallerecsize{0800} + +% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): +\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} +\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} +\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} +\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} +\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} +\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} +\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\titlebf=\titlerm -\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} +\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 -\def\authorrm{\secrm} -\ifjaTeX -\def\authormc{\secmc} -\fi +\def\titleecsize{2074} % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). -\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} -\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} -\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} -\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} -\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} -\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} -\ifpTeX -\font\chapmc=min10 scaled \magstep3 -\font\chapgt=goth10 scaled \magstep3 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\chapmc=dm10 scaled \magstep3 -\jfont\chapgt=dg10 scaled \magstep3 -\fi +\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} +\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} +\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} +\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} +\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} +\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} +\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} \let\chapbf=\chaprm -\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} +\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 +\def\chapecsize{1728} % Section fonts (14.4pt). -\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} -\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} -\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} -\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} -\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} -\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} -\ifpTeX -\font\secmc=min10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\secgt=goth10 scaled \magstep2 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\secmc=dm10 scaled \magstep2 -\jfont\secgt=dg10 scaled \magstep2 -\fi +\def\secnominalsize{14pt} +\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} +\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} +\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} +\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\secbf\secrm -\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} +\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 +\def\sececsize{1440} -% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. -% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. -% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1} -% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} -% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1} - -%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. -%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than -%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1. -%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315} -%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315} - -%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm - % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). -\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} -\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} -\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} -\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} -\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} -\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} -\ifpTeX -\font\ssecmc=min10 scaled 1315 -\font\ssecgt=goth10 scaled 1315 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\ssecmc=dm10 scaled 1315 -\jfont\ssecgt=dg10 scaled 1315 -\fi +\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} +\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} +\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} +\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} +\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} +\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} +\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} \let\ssecbf\ssecrm -\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} +\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 -% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, -% but that is not a standard magnification. +\def\ssececsize{1200} +% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). +\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} +\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} +\font\reducedi=cmmi10 +\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 +\def\reducedecsize{1000} + +\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM +\textfonts % reset the current fonts +\rm +} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi + + +% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with +% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU +% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the +% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. +% +\def\definetextfontsizex{% +% Text fonts (10pt). +\def\textnominalsize{10pt} +\edef\mainmagstep{1000} +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} +\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} +\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} +\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} +\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep +\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep +\def\textecsize{1000} + +% A few fonts for @defun names and args. +\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} +\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} +\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} +\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} +\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf +\let\tensl=\defsl \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} + +% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). +\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} +\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} +\font\smalli=cmmi9 +\font\smallsy=cmsy9 +\def\smallecsize{0900} + +% Fonts for small examples (8pt). +\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} +\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} +\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} +\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} +\font\smalleri=cmmi8 +\font\smallersy=cmsy8 +\def\smallerecsize{0800} + +% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): +\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} +\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} +\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} +\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} +\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} +\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} +\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\let\titlebf=\titlerm +\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} +\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 +\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 +\def\titleecsize{2074} + +% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). +\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} +\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} +\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} +\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} +\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\let\chapbf\chaprm +\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} +\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 +\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 +\def\chapecsize{1440} + +% Section fonts (12pt). +\def\secnominalsize{12pt} +\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} +\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} +\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} +\let\secbf\secrm +\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} +\font\seci=cmmi12 +\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 +\def\sececsize{1200} + +% Subsection fonts (10pt). +\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} +\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\let\ssecbf\ssecrm +\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} +\font\sseci=cmmi10 +\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 +\def\ssececsize{1000} + +% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). +\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} +\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} +\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} +\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} +\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} +\font\reducedi=cmmi9 +\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 +\def\reducedecsize{0900} + +\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs +\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM +\textfonts % reset the current fonts +\rm +} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex + + +% We provide the user-level command +% @fonttextsize 10 +% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. +% +\def\xiword{11} +\def\xword{10} +\def\xwordpt{10pt} +% +\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% + \def\textsizearg{#1}% + %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% + % + % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since + % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. + % + \begingroup \globaldefs=1 + \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex + \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi + \else + \errhelp=\EMsimple + \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} + \fi\fi + \endgroup +} + % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, -% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since -% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we -% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would -% also require loading a lot more fonts). +% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. We don't +% bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. % -\ifpTeX \def\resetmathfonts{% - \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy - \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf - \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf - \textfont\mcfam = \tenmin \textfont\gtfam = \tengt + \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy + \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf + \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf } -\else -\def\resetmathfonts{% - \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy - \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf - \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf -} -\fi % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead -% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work -% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most -% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam -% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to -% redefine \bf itself. -\ifjaTeX +% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the +% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire +% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. +% +% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) +% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used +% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. +% +% This all needs generalizing, badly. +% \def\textfonts{% \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc - \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl - \let\tenmin=\textmc \let\tengt=\textgt - \resetmathfonts} -\else -\def\textfonts{% - \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl - \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc - \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl - \resetmathfonts} -\fi -% -\ifjaTeX + \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy + \let\tenttsl=\textttsl + \def\curfontsize{text}% + \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} \def\titlefonts{% \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl - \let\tenmin=\titlemc \let\tengt=\titlegt - \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} -\else -\def\titlefonts{% - \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl - \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc - \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy - \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl - \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} -\fi -\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} -% -\ifjaTeX + \def\curfontsize{title}% + \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}} +\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} \def\chapfonts{% \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc - \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl - \let\tenmin=\chapmc \let\tengt=\chapgt + \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy + \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl + \def\curfontsize{chap}% + \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} -\else -\def\chapfonts{% - \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl - \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc - \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl - \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} -\fi -% -\ifjaTeX \def\secfonts{% \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc - \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl - \let\tenmin=\secmc \let\tengt=\secgt - \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} -\else -\def\secfonts{% - \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl - \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc - \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl - \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} -\fi -% -\ifjaTeX + \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy + \let\tenttsl=\secttsl + \def\curfontsize{sec}% + \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{17pt}} \def\subsecfonts{% \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc - \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl - \let\tenmin=\ssecmc \let\tengt=\ssecgt + \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy + \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl + \def\curfontsize{ssec}% + \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} -\else -\def\subsecfonts{% - \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl - \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc - \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl - \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} -\fi -\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? -% -\ifjaTeX +\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts +\def\reducedfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl + \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc + \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy + \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl + \def\curfontsize{reduced}% + \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} \def\smallfonts{% \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl - \let\tenmin=\smallmc \let\tengt=\smallgt - \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}} -\else -\def\smallfonts{% - \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl - \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc - \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy - \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl - \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}} -\fi -% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. -% -\textfonts + \def\curfontsize{small}% + \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} +\def\smallerfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl + \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc + \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy + \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl + \def\curfontsize{smaller}% + \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% + \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} -% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. +% Fonts for short table of contents. +\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 +\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} +\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} + +% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. \def\angleleft{$\langle$} \def\angleright{$\rangle$} +% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. +\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts + +% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample +% can fit this many characters: +% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 +% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: +% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 +% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth +% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. +% +% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): +% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 +% --karl, 24jan03. + +% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. +% +\definetextfontsizexi + + +\message{markup,} + +% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the +% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and +% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have +% this property, we can check that font parameter. +% +\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } + +% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will +% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. +% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost +% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles +% currently in effect. +\newif\ifmarkupvar +\newif\ifmarkupsamp +\newif\ifmarkupkey +%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. +%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. +\newif\ifmarkupcode +\newif\ifmarkupkbd +%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. +%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. +\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). +\newif\ifmarkupexample +\newif\ifmarkupverb +\newif\ifmarkupverbatim + +\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty + +\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% + \csname markup#1true\endcsname + \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% + \markupstylesetup +} + +\let\markupstylesetup\empty + +\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup + \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% + \def#1% +} + +% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. +\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp + \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname + \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi +} + +\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp + \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname + \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi +} + +{ +\catcode`\'=\active +\catcode`\`=\active + +\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} +\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} + +\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} +\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} +} + +\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright +% +\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright +% +\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright +% +\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright +% +\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright +% +\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft +\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright + +% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe +% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). +% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it +% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the +% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. +% +\def\codequoteright{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax + '% + \else \char'15 \fi + \else \char'15 \fi +} +% +% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. +% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like +% the code environments to do likewise. +% +\def\codequoteleft{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax + % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 + % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. + \relax`% + \else \char'22 \fi + \else \char'22 \fi +} + +% Commands to set the quote options. +% +\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\onword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname + = t% + \else\ifx\temp\offword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname + = \relax + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% + \fi\fi +} +% +\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\onword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname + = t% + \else\ifx\temp\offword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname + = \relax + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% + \fi\fi +} + +% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. +\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} + % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 -% Fonts for short table of contents. -\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} -\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} -\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} -\ifpTeX -\font\shortcontmc=min10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\shortcontgt=goth10 scaled \magstep1 -\fi -\ifjTeX -\jfont\shortcontmc=dm10 scaled \magstep1 -\jfont\shortcontgt=dg10 scaled \magstep1 -\fi -%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans -%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic +% Font commands. -% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction -% unless the following character is such as not to need one. -\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} -\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} -\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} +% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. +% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, +% and 2) do not add an italic correction. +\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% + \ifusingtt + {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% + {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% + \next +} +\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} +\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} +% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following +% character) is such as not to need one. +\def\smartitaliccorrection{% + \ifx\next,% + \else\ifx\next-% + \else\ifx\next.% + \else\ifx\next\.% + \else\ifx\next\comma% + \else\ptexslash + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \aftersmartic +} + +% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. +\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} + +% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want +% ttsl for book titles, do we? +\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} + +\def\aftersmartic{} +\def\var#1{% + \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic + \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% + \smartslanted{#1}% +} + \let\i=\smartitalic -\let\var=\smartslanted +\let\slanted=\smartslanted \let\dfn=\smartslanted \let\emph=\smartitalic -\let\cite=\smartslanted +% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. +\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font +\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font +\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font + +% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} \let\strong=\b +% @sansserif, explicit sans. +\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} + % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. @@ -1449,30 +2869,39 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } +% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. +% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and +% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. +% +\catcode`@=11 + \def\plainfrenchspacing{% + \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m + \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m + \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends + } + \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% + \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 + \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 + \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends + } +\catcode`@=\other +\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default + +% @t, explicit typewriter. \def\t#1{% - {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% + {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% \null } -\let\ttfont=\t -\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} -\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} -\font\keysy=cmsy9 -\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% - \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% - \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt - \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% - \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% - \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} -% The old definition, with no lozenge: -%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} -\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} -% @file, @option are the same as @samp. -\let\file=\samp -\let\option=\samp +% @samp. +\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} -% @code is a modification of @t, -% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. +% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. +\let\indicateurl=\samp + +% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same +% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. +% This is a subroutine for that. \def\tclose#1{% {% % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. @@ -1488,110 +2917,245 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \nohyphenation % \rawbackslash - \frenchspacing + \plainfrenchspacing #1% }% - \null + \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 } -% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. +% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. +% (But see \codedashfinish below.) % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. - +% % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) -% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -% -- rms. +% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. { - \catcode`\-=\active - \catcode`\_=\active + \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active + \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active + \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions % \global\def\code{\begingroup - \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash - \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder + \setupmarkupstyle{code}% + % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. + \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active + \ifallowcodebreaks + \let-\codedash + \let_\codeunder + \else + \let-\normaldash + \let_\realunder + \fi + % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break + % after the hyphen. + \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash + % \codex } % - % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index, - % just treat them as a normal -. - \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} + \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} + \gdef\codedashfinish{% + \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. + % + % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless + % (a) the next character is a -, or + % (b) the preceding character is a -. + % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. + % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. + \ifx\next\codedash \else + \ifx\codedashprev\codedash + \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi + \fi + % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a + % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. + \global\let\codedashprev= \next + } } - -\def\realdash{-} -\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} -\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}} +\def\normaldash{-} +% \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} -%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary +\def\codeunder{% + % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ + % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) + % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us + % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. + \ifusingtt{\ifmmode + \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. + \else\normalunderscore \fi + \discretionary{}{}{}}% + {\_}% +} -% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, -% then @kbd has no effect. +% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., +% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. +% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - +% and _ on and off. +% +\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue -% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), -% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), -% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). -\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} -\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% - \def\arg{#1}% - \ifx\arg\worddistinct - \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% - \else\ifx\arg\wordexample - \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% - \else\ifx\arg\wordcode - \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% - \fi\fi\fi +\def\keywordtrue{true} +\def\keywordfalse{false} + +\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% + \def\txiarg{#1}% + \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue + \allowcodebreakstrue + \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse + \allowcodebreaksfalse + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% + \fi\fi } -\def\worddistinct{distinct} -\def\wordexample{example} -\def\wordcode{code} -% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro, -% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.) -\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl} +% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, +% so use \code rather than \samp. +\let\command=\code +\let\env=\code +\let\file=\code +\let\option=\code -\def\xkey{\key} -\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% -\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% -\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi -\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} +% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional +% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and +% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in +% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. -% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. -\let\url=\code -\let\env=\code -\let\command=\code +% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second +% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). +\newif\ifurefurlonlylink -% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) -% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third -% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url -% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in -% a hypertex \special here. +% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected +% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which +% didn't support automatic breaking.) +\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} +\let\uref=\urefbreak % -\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} -\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup +\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} +\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example \unsepspaces \pdfurl{#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that \else - \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \ifpdf - \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it + % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX + \ifurefurlonlylink + % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg + \unhbox0 + \else + % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, + % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. + \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% + \fi \else - \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url + \else + % For XeTeX + \ifurefurlonlylink + % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg + \unhbox0 + \else + % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, + % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. + \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% + \fi + \fi \fi \else - \code{#1}% only url given, so show it + \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it \fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} +% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). +\def\urefcatcodes{% + \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active + \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active + \catcode`\/=\active +} +{ + \urefcatcodes + % + \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup + \setupmarkupstyle{code}% + \urefcatcodes + \let&\urefcodeamp + \let.\urefcodedot + \let#\urefcodehash + \let?\urefcodequest + \let/\urefcodeslash + \codex + } + % + % By default, they are just regular characters. + \global\def&{\normalamp} + \global\def.{\normaldot} + \global\def#{\normalhash} + \global\def?{\normalquest} + \global\def/{\normalslash} +} + +% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help +% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in +% cmtt at least, especially for dots. +\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} +\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} +\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} +\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} +% +\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} +\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} +\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} +\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} +\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} +{ + \catcode`\/=\active + \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% + \urefprestretch \slashChar + % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of + % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. + \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi + } +} + +% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special +% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so +% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. +% +\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% + \def\txiarg{#1}% + \ifx\txiarg\wordnone + \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore + \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter + \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% + \fi\fi\fi +} +\def\wordafter{after} +\def\wordbefore{before} +\def\wordnone{none} + +\urefbreakstyle after + +% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. +% +\let\url=\uref + % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. -% +% %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} \ifpdf \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} @@ -1603,40 +3167,549 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \endlink \endgroup} \else - \let\email=\uref + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \let\email=\uref + \else + \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} + \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup + \unsepspaces + \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi + \endlink + \endgroup} + \fi \fi -% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the -% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and -% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have -% this property, we can check that font parameter. +% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), +% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), +% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). +\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% + \def\txiarg{#1}% + \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% + \fi\fi\fi +} +\def\worddistinct{distinct} +\def\wordexample{example} +\def\wordcode{code} + +% Default is `distinct'. +\kbdinputstyle distinct + +% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, +% then @kbd has no effect. +\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} + +\def\xkey{\key} +\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% + \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% + \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% + \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi + \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi +} + +% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. +%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} +%\font\keysy=cmsy9 +%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% +% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% +% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt +% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% +% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% +% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} + +% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already +% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But +% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. % -\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } +\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% + \nohyphenation + \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi + #1}\null} +% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} +\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} + +% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) +\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} +\def\click{\arrow} + % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. % \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} -\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} +% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. +% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for +% all-uppercase. +% +\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} +\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% + {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% + \def\temp{#2}% + \ifx\temp\empty \else + \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% + \fi + \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 +} -% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', -% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for -% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. -%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} +% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. +% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. +% +\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} +\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% + {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% + \def\temp{#2}% + \ifx\temp\empty \else + \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% + \fi + \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 +} -% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. -\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font -\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font -\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font +% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. +% +\def\asis#1{#1} -% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps. -\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} +% @math outputs its argument in math mode. +% +% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean +% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make +% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, +% which is what @var uses. +{ + \catcode`\_ = \active + \gdef\mathunderscore{% + \catcode`\_=\active + \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% + } +} +% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. +% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no +% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. +% +% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. +\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} +% +\def\math{% + \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already + \tex + \mathunderscore + \let\\ = \mathbackslash + \mathactive + % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode + \let\"=\ddot + \let\'=\acute + \let\==\bar + \let\^=\hat + \let\`=\grave + \let\u=\breve + \let\v=\check + \let\~=\tilde + \let\dotaccent=\dot + % have to provide another name for sup operator + \let\mathopsup=\sup + $\expandafter\finishmath\fi +} +\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. -% @pounds{} is a sterling sign. +% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. +% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument +% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). +% +{ + \catcode`^ = \active + \catcode`< = \active + \catcode`> = \active + \catcode`+ = \active + \catcode`' = \active + \gdef\mathactive{% + \let^ = \ptexhat + \let< = \ptexless + \let> = \ptexgtr + \let+ = \ptexplus + \let' = \ptexquoteright + } +} + +% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. +% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch +% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the +% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not +% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. +% +\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} +\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}% +% +\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} +\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}% + +% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. +% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, +% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. +% +\def\outfmtnametex{tex} +% +\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} +\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% + \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% + \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi +} +% +% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if +% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. +\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} +\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% + \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% + \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi +} +% +% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid +% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for +% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being +% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal +% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as +% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the +% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. +% +\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} +\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} +\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% + \def\inlinerawname{#1}% + \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi + \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. +} + +% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. +% +\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} +\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% + \def\inlinevarname{#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax + \else\ignorespaces#2\fi +} + +% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. +% +\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} +\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% + \def\inlinevarname{#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi +} + + +\message{glyphs,} +% and logos. + +% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. +\def\@{\char64 } +\let\atchar=\@ + +% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. +\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} +\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} +\let\{=\lbracechar +\let\}=\rbracechar + +% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. +\let\comma = , + +% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent +% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. +\let\, = \ptexc +\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot +\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} +\let\tieaccent = \ptext +\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb +\let\udotaccent = \d + +% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm +% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. +\def\questiondown{?`} +\def\exclamdown{!`} +\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} +\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} + +% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. +\def\imacro{i} +\def\jmacro{j} +\def\dotless#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi + \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi + \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% + \fi\fi +} + +% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a +% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) +% +\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } + +% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in +% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most +% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using +% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and +% \scriptscriptstyle). +% +\def\LaTeX{% + L\kern-.36em + {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% + \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% + \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt + % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. + % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. + \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% + \else + % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. + \selectfonts\lllsize A% + \fi + }% + \vss + }}% + \kern-.15em + \TeX +} + +% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode +% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, +% but safer, and can't hurt. +\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} +\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} +% +\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} +\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} +\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} +\def\minus{\ensuremath-} + +% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. +% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm +% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, +% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do +% whichever is larger. +% +\def\dots{% + \leavevmode + \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods + \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em + \dimen0 = \wd0 + \else + \dimen0 = 1.5em + \fi + \hbox to \dimen0{% + \hskip 0pt plus.25fil + .\hskip 0pt plus1fil + .\hskip 0pt plus1fil + .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil + }% +} + +% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. +% +\def\enddots{% + \dots + \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor +} + +% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. +% +% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of +% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. +% +\def\point{$\star$} +\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} +\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} +\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} +\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} +\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} + +% The @error{} command. +% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. +% +\newbox\errorbox +% +{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. +\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules +% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) +\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} +% +\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil + \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. + \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. + \vbox{% + \hrule height\dimen2 + \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. + \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. + \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. + \hrule height\dimen2} + \hfil} +% +\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} + +% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. +% \def\pounds{{\it\$}} +% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. +% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik +% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and +% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). +% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. +% +% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore +% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular +% font height. +% +% feymr - regular +% feymo - slanted +% feybr - bold +% feybo - bold slanted +% +% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. +% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. +% Hmm. +% +% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? +% Hope not. +% +% +\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} +\def\eurofont{% + % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in + % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that + % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the + % font installed. + % + % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale + % that to the current nominal size. + % + % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but + % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. + % + \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% + % + \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename + % bold: + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize + \else + % regular: + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize + \fi + \thiseurofont +} +% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because +% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect +% the redefinition. +% +% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. +\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth +\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth +\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn +\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn +% +\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} +\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} +\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} +\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} +\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} +\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} +\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} +\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} +% +% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but +% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the +% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer +% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. +% +% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using +% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in +% the same EC font. +\def\ogonek#1{{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek + \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek + \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek + \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek + \else + \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% + \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% + \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% + \fi + \fi\fi\fi\fi + }% +} +\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} +\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} +\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} +\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} +% +% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) +% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text +% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec +% package and follow the same conventions. +% +\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} +\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} +% +\def\etcfont#1{% + % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this + % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German + % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so + % hopefully nobody will notice/care. + \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% + \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% + \ifmonospace + % typewriter: + \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize + \else + \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename + % bold: + \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize + \else + % regular: + \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize + \fi + \fi + \thisecfont +} + +% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really +% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. +% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. +% +\def\registeredsymbol{% + $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% + \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% + }$% +} + +% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. +% +\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} + +% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: +% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 +% so we'll define it if necessary. +% +\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined +\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} +\fi + +% Quotes. +\chardef\quotedblleft="5C +\chardef\quotedblright=`\" +\chardef\quoteleft=`\` +\chardef\quoteright=`\' + + \message{page headings,} \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in @@ -1646,101 +3719,114 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \newif\ifseenauthor \newif\iffinishedtitlepage -% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the -% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. -% -\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage - \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue -\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage - \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue +% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or +% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. +\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% + \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo + command; move your @contents command if you want the contents + after the title page.}}% +\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% + \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo + command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you + want the contents after the title page.}}% -\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} -\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% - \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} +\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% + \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% + \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} -\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts - \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm - \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% - % -\ifjaTeX - \def\authorfont{\authormc\authorrm - \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% -\else - \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% -\fi - % - % Leave some space at the very top of the page. - \vglue\titlepagetopglue - % - % Now you can print the title using @title. - \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% - \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} - % print a rule at the page bottom also. - \finishedtitlepagefalse - \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% - % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. - \finishedtitlepagetrue - % - % Now you can put text using @subtitle. - \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% - \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% - % - % @author should come last, but may come many times. - \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% - \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi - {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% - % - % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space - % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. - \let\oldpage = \page - \def\page{% +\envdef\titlepage{% + % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. + \begingroup + \parindent=0pt \textfonts + % Leave some space at the very top of the page. + \vglue\titlepagetopglue + % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. + \finishedtitlepagetrue + % + % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space + % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. + \let\oldpage = \page + \def\page{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else - \finishtitlepage + \finishtitlepage \fi - \oldpage \let\page = \oldpage - \hbox{}}% -% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} + \page + \null + }% } \def\Etitlepage{% - \iffinishedtitlepage\else - \finishtitlepage - \fi - % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, - % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. - % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page - % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. - \oldpage - \endgroup - % - % If they want short, they certainly want long too. - \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage - \shortcontents - \contents - \global\let\shortcontents = \relax - \global\let\contents = \relax - \fi - % - \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage - \contents - \global\let\contents = \relax - \global\let\shortcontents = \relax - \fi - % - \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi - % - \HEADINGSon + \iffinishedtitlepage\else + \finishtitlepage + \fi + % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, + % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. + % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page + % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. + \oldpage + \endgroup + % + % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are + % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. + \HEADINGSon } \def\finishtitlepage{% - \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize - \vskip\titlepagebottomglue - \finishedtitlepagetrue + \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize + \vskip\titlepagebottomglue + \finishedtitlepagetrue } -%%% Set up page headings and footings. +% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, +% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used +% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because +% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par +% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. +% +\def\raggedtitlesettings{% + \rmisbold + \hyphenpenalty=10000 + \parindent=0pt + \tolerance=5000 + \ptexraggedright +} +% Macros to be used within @titlepage: + +\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm +\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} + +\parseargdef\title{% + \checkenv\titlepage + \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% + % print a rule at the page bottom also. + \finishedtitlepagefalse + \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt +} + +\parseargdef\subtitle{% + \checkenv\titlepage + {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% +} + +% @author should come last, but may come many times. +% It can also be used inside @quotation. +% +\parseargdef\author{% + \def\temp{\quotation}% + \ifx\thisenv\temp + \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. + \else + \checkenv\titlepage + \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi + {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% + \fi +} + + +% Set up page headings and footings. + \let\thispage=\folio \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages @@ -1748,7 +3834,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages -% Now make Tex use those variables +% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline @@ -1762,44 +3848,69 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @evenfooting @thisfile|| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile -\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} -\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} -\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} -\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} -\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} -\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} - -{\catcode`\@=0 % - -\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} -\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} +\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} -\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} -\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} +\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} -\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% +\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% -\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} -\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} +\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} -\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} -\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} +\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% % % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. - \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip - \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip + \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt + \global\advance\vsize by -12pt } -\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} +\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} + +% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page +% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page % -}% unbind the catcode of @. +% The same set of arguments for: +% +% @oddheadingmarks +% @evenfootingmarks +% @oddfootingmarks +% @everyheadingmarks +% @everyfootingmarks +% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, +% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of +% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. +% +\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} +\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} +\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} +\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} +\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} + \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } +\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} + \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } +% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. +\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname + \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp +} + +\everyheadingmarks bottom +\everyfootingmarks bottom + % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. % @headings off turns them off. @@ -1810,35 +3921,39 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % By default, they are off at the start of a document, % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. -\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} +\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} -\def\HEADINGSoff{ -\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} -\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} -\HEADINGSoff +\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination + \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% + \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% +} + +\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting +\HEADINGSoff % it's the default + % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top % edge of all pages. -\def\HEADINGSdouble{ +\def\HEADINGSdouble{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} -\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, % page number on top right. -\def\HEADINGSsingle{ +\def\HEADINGSsingle{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} -\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} -\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} @@ -1849,7 +3964,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} -\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } @@ -1857,13 +3972,16 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} -\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} -\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } % Subroutines used in generating headings -% Produces Day Month Year style of output. +% This produces Day Month Year style of output. +% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set +% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). +\ifx\today\thisisundefined \def\today{% \number\day\space \ifcase\month @@ -1872,16 +3990,16 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec \fi \space\number\year} +\fi % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. % It generates no output of its own. \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} -\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} -\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} +\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} \message{tables,} -% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). +% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). % default indentation of table text \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in @@ -1893,7 +4011,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin \newdimen\itemmax -% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with +% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with % these defs. % They also define \itemindex % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). @@ -1905,22 +4023,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} -\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} -\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} - -\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} -\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} - -\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% - \itemzzz {#1}} - -\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% - \itemzzz {#1}} - \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \advance\hsize by -\tableindent - \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% + \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% \itemindex{#1}% \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. % @@ -1936,7 +4042,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \begingroup \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent \advance\hsize by\tableindent - \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil + \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax \leavevmode\unhbox0\par \endgroup % @@ -1944,10 +4050,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. \nobreak \vskip-\parskip % - % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately - % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following - % \baselineskip glue. - \nobreak + % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if + % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no + % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would + % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this + % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert + % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. + % + \penalty 10001 \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse \else @@ -1966,98 +4076,122 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \fi } -\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} -\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} -\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} -\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} -\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} -\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} +\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} +\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} -% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work. -\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} - % @table, @ftable, @vtable. -\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} -{\obeylines\obeyspaces% -\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% -\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}} - -\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} -{\obeylines\obeyspaces% -\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% -\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley -\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% -\let\Etable=\relax}} - -\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} -{\obeylines\obeyspaces% -\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% -\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley -\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% -\let\Etable=\relax}} - -\def\dontindex #1{} -\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% -\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% - -{\obeyspaces % -\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% -\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} - -\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% -\aboveenvbreak % -\begingroup % -\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. -\let\itemindex=#1% -\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % -\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % -\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % -\def\itemfont{#2}% -\itemmax=\tableindent % -\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % -\advance \leftskip by \tableindent % -\exdentamount=\tableindent -\parindent = 0pt -\parskip = \smallskipamount -\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% -\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% -\let\item = \internalBitem % -\let\itemx = \internalBitemx % -\let\kitem = \internalBkitem % -\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % -\let\xitem = \internalBxitem % -\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % +\envdef\table{% + \let\itemindex\gobble + \tablecheck{table}% } +\envdef\ftable{% + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% + \tablecheck{ftable}% +} +\envdef\vtable{% + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% + \tablecheck{vtable}% +} +\def\tablecheck#1{% + \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active + \endgroup + \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is + that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% + \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% + \else + \let\next\tablex + \fi + \next +} +\def\tablex#1{% + \def\itemindicate{#1}% + \parsearg\tabley +} +\def\tabley#1{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% + \expandafter + }\temp \endtablez +} +\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% + \aboveenvbreak + \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi + \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi + \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi + \itemmax=\tableindent + \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin + \advance \leftskip by \tableindent + \exdentamount=\tableindent + \parindent = 0pt + \parskip = \smallskipamount + \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi + \let\item = \internalBitem + \let\itemx = \internalBitemx +} +\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} +\let\Eftable\Etable +\let\Evtable\Etable +\let\Eitemize\Etable +\let\Eenumerate\Etable % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize \newcount \itemno -\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} +\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} -\def\itemizezzz #1{% - \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize - \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} +\def\doitemize#1{% + \aboveenvbreak + \itemmax=\itemindent + \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin + \advance\leftskip by \itemindent + \exdentamount=\itemindent + \parindent=0pt + \parskip=\smallskipamount + \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi + % + % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says + % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error + % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the + % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if + % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. + \def\itemcontents{#1}% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% + % + % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. + \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi + % + \let\item=\itemizeitem } -\def\itemizey #1#2{% -\aboveenvbreak % -\itemmax=\itemindent % -\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % -\advance \leftskip by \itemindent % -\exdentamount=\itemindent -\parindent = 0pt % -\parskip = \smallskipamount % -\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% -\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% -\def\itemcontents{#1}% -\let\item=\itemizeitem} +% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. +% +\def\itemizeitem{% + \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations + {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break + {% + % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a + % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have + % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero + % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the + % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there + % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much + % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least + % that's the theory. + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi + \noindent + \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% + % + \ifinner\else + \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. + \fi + % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an + % @itemize looks awful there. + }% + \flushcr +} -% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. -% These are `.?!:;,' -\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 - \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } - % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. % @@ -2067,11 +4201,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No % argument is the same as `1'. % -\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} -\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} +\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% - \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate - % % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. \def\thearg{#1}% \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi @@ -2142,13 +4273,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} }% } -% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the +% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. % \def\startenumeration#1{% \advance\itemno by -1 - \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr + \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr } % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg @@ -2159,17 +4290,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} -% Definition of @item while inside @itemize. -\def\itemizeitem{% -\advance\itemno by 1 -{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% -\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi -{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt -\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% -\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% -\flushcr} - % @multitable macros % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 % @@ -2195,24 +4316,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item ... % using the widest term desired in each column. -% -% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in -% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it -% will parse correctly, i.e., -% -% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 -% template} -% Not: -% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} -% {Column 3 template} % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. -% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their -% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. +% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt +% if they are. % Sample multitable: @@ -2256,13 +4367,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} \newif\ifsetpercent -% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which -% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we -% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the -% percent of \hsize for this column. -\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {% +% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might +% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. +% +\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% \global\advance\colcount by 1 - \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% \setuptable } @@ -2279,8 +4389,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \let\go\pickupwholefraction \else \global\advance\colcount by 1 - \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator; - % typically that is always in the input, anyway. + \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a + % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% \fi \fi @@ -2295,18 +4405,44 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \go } -% This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is -% not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we -% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. -% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. -\def\tab{&} +% multitable-only commands. +% +% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments +% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an +% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to +% undo it ourselves. +\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable +\def\headitem{% + \checkenv\multitable + \crcr + \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings + \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs + \the\everytab % for the first item +}% +% +% default for tables with no headings. +\let\headitemcrhook=\relax +% +% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template +% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until +% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. +% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. +\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: % -\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} -\def\dotable#1{\bgroup +\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. +% +\envdef\multitable{% \vskip\parskip - \let\item\crcr + \startsavinginserts + % + % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. + % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries + % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka + % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. + \def\item{\crcr}% + % \tolerance=9500 \hbadness=9500 \setmultitablespacing @@ -2314,442 +4450,380 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.} \parindent=\multitableparindent \overfullrule=0pt \global\colcount=0 - \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}% % + \everycr = {% + \noalign{% + \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. + \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. + % + % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: + \checkinserts + % + % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: + \headitemcrhook + \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax + }% + }% + % + \parsearg\domultitable +} +\def\domultitable#1{% % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable % - % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of - % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. - % The table preamble - % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. - \everycr{\noalign{% - % - % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. - % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table - % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem - % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. - \global\colcount=0\relax}}% - % % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will % be used as many times as user calls for columns. % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and % continue for many paragraphs if desired. - \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax - \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname - % - % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other - % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after - % the first one. - % - % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace - % to the width of each template entry. - % - % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will - % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip - % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at - % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. - % - % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. - \rightskip=0pt - \ifnum\colcount=1 - % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. - \advance\hsize by\leftskip - \else - \ifsetpercent \else - % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize - % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. - \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace - \fi - % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: - \leftskip=\multitablecolspace - \fi - % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious - % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the - % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. - % For example: - % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 - % @item @code{#} - % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. - % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking - % characters. - \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr + \halign\bgroup &% + \global\advance\colcount by 1 + \multistrut + \vtop{% + % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: + \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname + % + % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other + % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after + % the first one. + % + % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace + % to the width of each template entry. + % + % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will + % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip + % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at + % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. + % + % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. + \rightskip=0pt + \ifnum\colcount=1 + % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. + \advance\hsize by\leftskip + \else + \ifsetpercent \else + % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize + % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. + \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace + \fi + % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: + \leftskip=\multitablecolspace + \fi + % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious + % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the + % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. + % For example: + % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 + % @item @code{#} + % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. + % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively + % marking characters. + \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut + }\cr } +\def\Emultitable{% + \crcr + \egroup % end the \halign + \global\setpercentfalse +} -\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. -% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on -% current baselineskip. +\def\setmultitablespacing{% + \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing + % + % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in + % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on + % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. + % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 -%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, -%% to keep lines equally spaced -\let\multistrut = \strut -\else -%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be? -\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 -width0pt\relax} \fi -%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of -%% table. If not, do nothing. -%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. +\fi +% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of +% table. If not, do nothing. +% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace -\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller - %% than skip between lines in the table. +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller + % than skip between lines in the table. \fi% \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace -\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller - %% than skip between lines in the table. +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller + % than skip between lines in the table. \fi} \message{conditionals,} -% Prevent errors for section commands. -% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. -\def\ignoresections{% - \let\chapter=\relax - \let\unnumbered=\relax - \let\top=\relax - \let\unnumberedsec=\relax - \let\unnumberedsection=\relax - \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax - \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax - \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax - \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax - \let\section=\relax - \let\subsec=\relax - \let\subsubsec=\relax - \let\subsection=\relax - \let\subsubsection=\relax - \let\appendix=\relax - \let\appendixsec=\relax - \let\appendixsection=\relax - \let\appendixsubsec=\relax - \let\appendixsubsection=\relax - \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax - \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax - \let\contents=\relax - \let\smallbook=\relax - \let\titlepage=\relax -} -% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source -% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used -% incorrectly. +% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, +% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't +% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we +% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't +% attempt to close an environment group. % -\def\ignoremorecommands{% - \let\defcodeindex = \relax - \let\defcv = \relax - \let\deffn = \relax - \let\deffnx = \relax - \let\defindex = \relax - \let\defivar = \relax - \let\defmac = \relax - \let\defmethod = \relax - \let\defop = \relax - \let\defopt = \relax - \let\defspec = \relax - \let\deftp = \relax - \let\deftypefn = \relax - \let\deftypefun = \relax - \let\deftypeivar = \relax - \let\deftypeop = \relax - \let\deftypevar = \relax - \let\deftypevr = \relax - \let\defun = \relax - \let\defvar = \relax - \let\defvr = \relax - \let\ref = \relax - \let\xref = \relax - \let\printindex = \relax - \let\pxref = \relax - \let\settitle = \relax - \let\setchapternewpage = \relax - \let\setchapterstyle = \relax - \let\everyheading = \relax - \let\evenheading = \relax - \let\oddheading = \relax - \let\everyfooting = \relax - \let\evenfooting = \relax - \let\oddfooting = \relax - \let\headings = \relax - \let\include = \relax - \let\lowersections = \relax - \let\down = \relax - \let\raisesections = \relax - \let\up = \relax - \let\set = \relax - \let\clear = \relax - \let\item = \relax +\def\makecond#1{% + \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax + \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 } +\makecond{iftex} +\makecond{ifnotdocbook} +\makecond{ifnothtml} +\makecond{ifnotinfo} +\makecond{ifnotplaintext} +\makecond{ifnotxml} -% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. +% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. % -\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} - -% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. -% -\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} +\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} +\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} +\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} +\def\html{\doignore{html}} +\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} +\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} -\def\html{\doignore{html}} +\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} +\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} +\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} -\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} +\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} -% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file -% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. -\let\dircategory = \comment - -% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. +% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. % +% A count to remember the depth of nesting. +\newcount\doignorecount + \def\doignore#1{\begingroup - % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. - \ignoresections + % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: + \obeylines + \catcode`\@ = \other + \catcode`\{ = \other + \catcode`\} = \other % - % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. - % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in - % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match. - \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}% - % % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. - \catcode32 = 10 + \spaceisspace % - % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble. - \catcode`\{ = 9 - \catcode`\} = 9 + % Count number of #1's that we've seen. + \doignorecount = 0 % - % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence. - \catcode`\@ = 12 - % - % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line - % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example) - % @c @end ifinfo - % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored. - % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.) - \catcode`\c = 14 - % - % And now expand that command. - \doignoretext + % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. + \dodoignore{#1}% } -% What we do to finish off ignored text. -% -\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% - -\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse -\def\obstexwarn{% - \ifwarnedobs\relax\else - % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. - % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. - \immediate\write16{} - \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} - \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} - \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} - \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} - \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} - \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} - \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} - \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} - \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} - \immediate\write16{} - \global\warnedobstrue - \fi -} - -% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a -% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), -% uncomment the following line: -%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax - -% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for -% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. -% -\def\nestedignore#1{% - \obstexwarn - % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end - % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the - % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize - % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on - % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. +{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. + \obeylines % % - \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup - % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. - \ignoresections + \gdef\dodoignore#1{% + % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. % - % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the - % @end command again. - \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% + % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. + \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% + \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% % - % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no - % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do - % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we - % undefine them. + % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a + % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for + % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) + \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% % - % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; - % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. - \ignoremorecommands - % - % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define - % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use - % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites - % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still - % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of - % stuff compared to the main input. - % - \nullfont - \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont - \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont - \let\tensf=\nullfont - % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample). - \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont - \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont - \let\smallsf=\nullfont - % - % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. - \tracinglostchars = 0 - % - % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. - \frenchspacing - % - % Don't report underfull hboxes. - \hbadness = 10000 - % - % Do minimal line-breaking. - \pretolerance = 10000 - % - % Do not execute instructions in @tex - \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}% - % Do not execute macro definitions. - % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off. - \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}% + % And now expand that command. + \doignoretext ^^M% + }% } +\def\doignoreyyy#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. + \let\next\doignoretextzzz + \else % Found a nested condition, ... + \advance\doignorecount by 1 + \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. + % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). + \fi + \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. +} + +% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". +% +\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% + \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. + \let\next\enddoignore + \else % Still inside a nested condition. + \advance\doignorecount by -1 + \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. + \fi + \next +} + +% Finish off ignored text. +{ \obeylines% + % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim + % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional + % would result in a blank line in the output. + \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% +} + + % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. % % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we -% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid -% losing inside @example, for instance. +% didn't need it. +% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. % -\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 - \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. - \parsearg\setxxx} -\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} +\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% - \def\temp{#2}% - \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty - \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. - \fi - \endgroup + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \def\temp{#2}% + \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% + \ifx\temp\empty + \next{}% + \else + \setzzz#2\endsetzzz + \fi + }% } -% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or -% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into -% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. -\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} +% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. +\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. % -\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} -\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} +\parseargdef\clear{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax + }% +} % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. +\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} +\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} { - \catcode`\_ = \active + \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active % - % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if - % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any - % such active characters to their normal equivalents. - \gdef\value{\begingroup - \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 - \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore - \valuexxx} + \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% + \let\value = \expandablevalue + % We don't want these characters active, ... + \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other + % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if + % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. + % So \let them to their normal equivalents. + \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore + } } -\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's -% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones -% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything -% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result -% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value -% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail -% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a -% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). -% +% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). +% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since +% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the +% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain +% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work +% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). +% +% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* +% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr +% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's +% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. +% \def\expandablevalue#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax {[No value for ``#1'']}% + \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi } -% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined -% with @set. +% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the +% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when +% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. +% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it +% will be set by the time it is read back in. % -\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} -\def\ifsetxxx #1{% +% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. +\def\dummyvalue#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifsetfail + \noexpand\value{#1}% \else - \expandafter\ifsetsucceed + \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi } -\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} -\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} -\defineunmatchedend{ifset} -% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been -% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. -% -\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} -\def\ifclearxxx #1{% +% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value +% if possible, otherwise sort late. +\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifclearsucceed + ZZZZZZZ \else - \expandafter\ifclearfail + \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi } -\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} -\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} -\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} -% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text -% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex' -% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex. +% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined +% with @set. +% +% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call +% \makecond and then redefine. % -\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} -\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} -\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} -\defineunmatchedend{iftex} -\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} -\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} +\makecond{ifset} +\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} +\def\doifset#1#2{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \let\next=\empty + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax + #1% If not set, redefine \next. + \fi + \expandafter + }\next +} +\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} -% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it -% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no -% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must -% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't -% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since -% the @ifset might be nested.) +% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been +% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. % -\def\conditionalsucceed#1{% - \edef\temp{% - % Remember the current value of \E#1. - \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% - % - % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. - \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% - }% - \temp -} +% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the +% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, +% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. +% +\makecond{ifclear} +\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} +\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} -% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the -% control sequences after we've constructed them. +% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written +% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the +% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered +% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. +% +\makecond{ifcommanddefined} +\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} % -\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} +\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% + \makevalueexpandable + \let\next=\empty + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax + #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. + \fi + \expandafter + }\next +} +\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} +% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. +\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} +\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% + \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} +\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} + +% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to +% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. +\set txicommandconditionals + +% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file +% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. +\let\dircategory=\comment + % @defininfoenclose. \let\definfoenclose=\comment @@ -2758,344 +4832,639 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % Index generation facilities % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite -% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. -{\catcode`\@=11 -\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} +% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. +\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} -% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. -% It automatically defines \fooindex such that -% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. -% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for -% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. +% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. +% It automatically defines \IXindex such that +% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. +% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for +% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long % for the sake of vms. % \def\newindex#1{% - \iflinks - \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname - \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file - \fi + \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index \noexpand\doindex{#1}} } % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} - +% \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. - +% +\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} +% \def\newcodeindex#1{% - \iflinks - \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname - \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 - \fi + \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% - \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}} + \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% } -\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} +% The default indices: +\newindex{cp}% concepts, +\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, +\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, +\newcodeindex{tp}% types, +\newcodeindex{ky}% keys +\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. + % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. -% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the -% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. -\def\synindex#1 #2 {% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname - \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname - \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo - \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex - \noexpand\doindex{#2}}% -} - +% % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo % inside @code. -\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname - \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname - \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo - \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex - \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}% +% +\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} +\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} + +% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), +% #3 the target index (bar). +\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% + \requireopenindexfile{#3}% + % redefine \fooindfile: + \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp + % redefine \fooindex: + \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% } -% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. +% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, -% and it is "foo", the name of the index. +% and it is the two-letter name of the index. -% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. -% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. +\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} +\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} -% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} -% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. - -\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} -\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} - % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. -\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} -\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} +\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} +\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} + +% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent +% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. +% \def\indexdummies{% -\def\ { }% -% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. -\def\"{\realbackslash "}% -\def\`{\realbackslash `}% -\def\'{\realbackslash '}% -\def\^{\realbackslash ^}% -\def\~{\realbackslash ~}% -\def\={\realbackslash =}% -\def\b{\realbackslash b}% -\def\c{\realbackslash c}% -\def\d{\realbackslash d}% -\def\u{\realbackslash u}% -\def\v{\realbackslash v}% -\def\H{\realbackslash H}% -% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. -\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% -\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% -\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% -\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% -\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% -\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% -\def\o{\realbackslash o}% -\def\O{\realbackslash O}% -\def\l{\realbackslash l}% -\def\L{\realbackslash L}% -\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% -% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. -% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to -% laboriously list every single command here.) -\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. -% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. -% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes -% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. -\let\{ = \mylbrace -\let\} = \myrbrace -\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% -\def\w{\realbackslash w }% -\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% -%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% -\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% -\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% -\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% -\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% -\def\less{\realbackslash less}% -\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% -\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% -\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% -\def\result{\realbackslash result}% -\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}% -\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}% -\def\print{\realbackslash print}% -\def\error{\realbackslash error}% -\def\point{\realbackslash point}% -\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}% -\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% -\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% -\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}% -\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}% -\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}% -\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}% -\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}% -\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% -\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% -\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% -\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}% -\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% -\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% -\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% -\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}% -\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% -\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% -\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% -\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% -\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% -\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% -\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% -\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}% + \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. + \definedummyletter\@% + \definedummyletter\ % + % + % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. + \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% + \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% + % + % Do the redefinitions. + \definedummies +} + +% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. % -% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not -% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any -% (non-fully-expandable) commands. -\let\value = \expandablevalue +\def\atdummies{% + \definedummyletter\@% + \definedummyletter\ % + \definedummyletter\{% + \definedummyletter\}% + % + % Do the redefinitions. + \definedummies + \otherbackslash +} + +% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively +% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, +% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for +% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word +% from whatever follows. % -\unsepspaces -% Turn off macro expansion -\turnoffmacros +% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and +% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then +% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). +% +% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the +% space. +% +\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% +\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% +\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter + +% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent +% the expansion of commands. +% +\def\definedummies{% + % + \let\commondummyword\definedummyword + \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter + \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent + \commondummiesnofonts + % + \definedummyletter\_% + \definedummyletter\-% + % + % Non-English letters. + \definedummyword\AA + \definedummyword\AE + \definedummyword\DH + \definedummyword\L + \definedummyword\O + \definedummyword\OE + \definedummyword\TH + \definedummyword\aa + \definedummyword\ae + \definedummyword\dh + \definedummyword\exclamdown + \definedummyword\l + \definedummyword\o + \definedummyword\oe + \definedummyword\ordf + \definedummyword\ordm + \definedummyword\questiondown + \definedummyword\ss + \definedummyword\th + % + % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. + \definedummyword\bf + \definedummyword\gtr + \definedummyword\hat + \definedummyword\less + \definedummyword\sf + \definedummyword\sl + \definedummyword\tclose + \definedummyword\tt + % + \definedummyword\LaTeX + \definedummyword\TeX + % + % Assorted special characters. + \definedummyword\atchar + \definedummyword\arrow + \definedummyword\bullet + \definedummyword\comma + \definedummyword\copyright + \definedummyword\registeredsymbol + \definedummyword\dots + \definedummyword\enddots + \definedummyword\entrybreak + \definedummyword\equiv + \definedummyword\error + \definedummyword\euro + \definedummyword\expansion + \definedummyword\geq + \definedummyword\guillemetleft + \definedummyword\guillemetright + \definedummyword\guilsinglleft + \definedummyword\guilsinglright + \definedummyword\lbracechar + \definedummyword\leq + \definedummyword\mathopsup + \definedummyword\minus + \definedummyword\ogonek + \definedummyword\pounds + \definedummyword\point + \definedummyword\print + \definedummyword\quotedblbase + \definedummyword\quotedblleft + \definedummyword\quotedblright + \definedummyword\quoteleft + \definedummyword\quoteright + \definedummyword\quotesinglbase + \definedummyword\rbracechar + \definedummyword\result + \definedummyword\sub + \definedummyword\sup + \definedummyword\textdegree + % + % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. + \macrolist + \let\value\dummyvalue + % + \normalturnoffactive } -% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces -% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the -% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). -{\obeyspaces - \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} +% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. +% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before +% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. +% +\def\commondummiesnofonts{% + % Control letters and accents. + \commondummyletter\!% + \commondummyaccent\"% + \commondummyaccent\'% + \commondummyletter\*% + \commondummyaccent\,% + \commondummyletter\.% + \commondummyletter\/% + \commondummyletter\:% + \commondummyaccent\=% + \commondummyletter\?% + \commondummyaccent\^% + \commondummyaccent\`% + \commondummyaccent\~% + \commondummyword\u + \commondummyword\v + \commondummyword\H + \commondummyword\dotaccent + \commondummyword\ogonek + \commondummyword\ringaccent + \commondummyword\tieaccent + \commondummyword\ubaraccent + \commondummyword\udotaccent + \commondummyword\dotless + % + % Texinfo font commands. + \commondummyword\b + \commondummyword\i + \commondummyword\r + \commondummyword\sansserif + \commondummyword\sc + \commondummyword\slanted + \commondummyword\t + % + % Commands that take arguments. + \commondummyword\abbr + \commondummyword\acronym + \commondummyword\anchor + \commondummyword\cite + \commondummyword\code + \commondummyword\command + \commondummyword\dfn + \commondummyword\dmn + \commondummyword\email + \commondummyword\emph + \commondummyword\env + \commondummyword\file + \commondummyword\image + \commondummyword\indicateurl + \commondummyword\inforef + \commondummyword\kbd + \commondummyword\key + \commondummyword\math + \commondummyword\option + \commondummyword\pxref + \commondummyword\ref + \commondummyword\samp + \commondummyword\strong + \commondummyword\tie + \commondummyword\U + \commondummyword\uref + \commondummyword\url + \commondummyword\var + \commondummyword\verb + \commondummyword\w + \commondummyword\xref +} -% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. -% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. -\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} -\def\indexdummytex{TeX} -\def\indexdummydots{...} +% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. +\newif\ifusebracesinindexes +\let\indexlbrace\relax +\let\indexrbrace\relax + +{\catcode`\@=0 +\catcode`\\=13 + @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} +} + +{ +\catcode`\<=13 +\catcode`\-=13 +\catcode`\`=13 + \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else + % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. + % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) + \let`=\empty + \fi + % + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else + \backslashdisappear + \fi + % + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else + \def-{}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else + \def<{}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else + \def\@{}% + \fi + } + + \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% + \useindexbackslash + \let-\normaldash + \let<\normalless + \def\@{@}% + } +} + + +% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index +% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all +% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string +% would be for a given command (usually its argument). +% \def\indexnofonts{% -% Just ignore accents. -\let\,=\indexdummyfont -\let\"=\indexdummyfont -\let\`=\indexdummyfont -\let\'=\indexdummyfont -\let\^=\indexdummyfont -\let\~=\indexdummyfont -\let\==\indexdummyfont -\let\b=\indexdummyfont -\let\c=\indexdummyfont -\let\d=\indexdummyfont -\let\u=\indexdummyfont -\let\v=\indexdummyfont -\let\H=\indexdummyfont -\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont -% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. -\def\oe{oe}% -\def\ae{ae}% -\def\aa{aa}% -\def\OE{OE}% -\def\AE{AE}% -\def\AA{AA}% -\def\o{o}% -\def\O{O}% -\def\l{l}% -\def\L{L}% -\def\ss{ss}% -\let\w=\indexdummyfont -\let\t=\indexdummyfont -\let\r=\indexdummyfont -\let\i=\indexdummyfont -\let\b=\indexdummyfont -\let\emph=\indexdummyfont -\let\strong=\indexdummyfont -\let\cite=\indexdummyfont -\let\sc=\indexdummyfont -%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command -% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... -%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont -\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont -\let\code=\indexdummyfont -\let\url=\indexdummyfont -\let\uref=\indexdummyfont -\let\env=\indexdummyfont -\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont -\let\command=\indexdummyfont -\let\option=\indexdummyfont -\let\file=\indexdummyfont -\let\samp=\indexdummyfont -\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont -\let\key=\indexdummyfont -\let\var=\indexdummyfont -\let\TeX=\indexdummytex -\let\dots=\indexdummydots -\def\@{@}% + % Accent commands should become @asis. + \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% + % We can just ignore other control letters. + \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% + % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. + \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent + \commondummiesnofonts + % + % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command + % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. + % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. + %\let\tt=\asis + % + \def\ { }% + \def\@{@}% + \def\_{\normalunderscore}% + \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting + % + \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% + \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% + \let\lbracechar\{% + \let\rbracechar\}% + % + % Non-English letters. + \def\AA{AA}% + \def\AE{AE}% + \def\DH{DZZ}% + \def\L{L}% + \def\OE{OE}% + \def\O{O}% + \def\TH{TH}% + \def\aa{aa}% + \def\ae{ae}% + \def\dh{dzz}% + \def\exclamdown{!}% + \def\l{l}% + \def\oe{oe}% + \def\ordf{a}% + \def\ordm{o}% + \def\o{o}% + \def\questiondown{?}% + \def\ss{ss}% + \def\th{th}% + % + \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% + \def\TeX{TeX}% + % + % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a + % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. + \defglyph\atchar{@}% + \defglyph\arrow{->}% + \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% + \defglyph\comma{,}% + \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% + \defglyph\dots{...}% + \defglyph\enddots{...}% + \defglyph\equiv{==}% + \defglyph\error{error}% + \defglyph\euro{euro}% + \defglyph\expansion{==>}% + \defglyph\geq{>=}% + \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% + \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% + \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% + \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% + \defglyph\leq{<=}% + \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% + \defglyph\minus{-}% + \defglyph\point{.}% + \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% + \defglyph\print{-|}% + \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% + \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% + \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% + \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% + \defglyph\quoteright{'}% + \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% + \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% + \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% + \defglyph\result{=>}% + \defglyph\textdegree{o}% + % + % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). + % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. + % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up + % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry + % that starts with \. + % + % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them + % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that + % goes to end-of-line is not handled. + % + \macrolist + \let\value\indexnofontsvalue } +\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above -% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. -% We must first make another character (@) an escape -% so we do not become unable to do a definition. + -{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other - @gdef@realbackslash{\}} -\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? -% For \ifx comparisons. -\def\emptymacro{\empty} - % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. -% -\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} +% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. +\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} -% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. +% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} +% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. +% TODO: Two-level index? Operation index? + +% Workhorse for all indexes. % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- -% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception -% is with defuns, which call us directly. +% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception +% is with most defuns, which call us directly). % \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% + \iflinks + {% + \requireopenindexfile{#1}% + % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). + \toks0 = {#2}% + % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. + \def\thirdarg{#3}% + \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else + \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% + \fi + % + \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% + % + \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite + }% + \fi +} + +% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. +\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% +\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname + \edef\suffix{#1}% + % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output + % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. + \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi + % Open the file + \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix + % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current + % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for + % preceding skips. + \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% +\fi} +\def\indexisfl{fl} + +% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in +% the index files. +\let\indexbackslash=\relax +{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active + @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} +} + +% Definition for writing index entry text. +\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}% + +% Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at +% the beginning of the index entry, like +% @cindex @sortas{september} \september +% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way +% to remove space before it. +{ +\catcode`\-=13 +\gdef\indexwritesortas{% + \begingroup + \indexnonalnumreappear + \indexwritesortasxxx} +\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% + \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} +} + + +% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. +% +\def\dosubindwrite{% % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else - \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% + \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% \fi - {% - \count255=\lastpenalty - {% - \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage - \escapechar=`\\ - {% - \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. - \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now - % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. - % - \def\thirdarg{#3}% - % - % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key. - \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro - \let\subentry = \empty - \else - \def\subentry{ #3}% - \fi - % - % First process the index entry with all font commands turned - % off to get the string to sort by. - {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}% - % - % Now the real index entry with the fonts. - \toks0 = {#2}% - % - % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index - % string. And include a space. - \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else - \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% - \fi - % - % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key - % and the original text, including any font commands. We write - % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to - % two when writing the .??s sorted result. - \edef\temp{% - \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% - \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% - }% - % - % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it - % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting - % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the - % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences - % like this: - % @end defun - % @tindex whatever - % @defun ... - % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the - % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of - % the previous defun. - % - % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We - % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. - % - % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. - % - \iflinks - \ifvmode - \skip0 = \lastskip - \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi - \fi - % - \temp % do the write - % - % - \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi - \fi - }% - }% - \penalty\count255 + % + % Remember, we are within a group. + \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage + \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output + % as is; and it will print as backslash. + % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex. + % + % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all + % font commands turned off. + {\indexnofonts + \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% + \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% + \let\{=\lbracechar + \let\}=\rbracechar + \indexnonalnumdisappear + \xdef\indexsortkey{}% + \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas + \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% + \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas + \ifx\indexsortkey\empty + \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}% + \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi + \fi }% + % + % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and + % the original text, including any font commands. We write + % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the + % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s + % sorted result. + \edef\temp{% + \write\writeto{% + \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% + }% + \temp } +\newbox\dummybox % used above +% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: +% +% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it +% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting +% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the +% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that +% sequences like this: +% @end defun +% @tindex whatever +% @defun ... +% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the +% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of +% the previous defun. +% +% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We +% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. +% +% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. +% +% But wait, there is a catch there: +% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not +% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts +% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual +% representation of the skip. +% +% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that +% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). +% +\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} +% +\newskip\whatsitskip +\newcount\whatsitpenalty +% +% ..., ready, GO: +% +\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode + #1% + \else + % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. + \whatsitskip = \lastskip + \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% + \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty + % + % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a + % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this + % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a + % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential + % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro + \else + \vskip-\whatsitskip + \fi + % + #1% + % + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro + % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and + % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want + % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various + % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any + % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: + % @deffn deffn-whatever + % @vindex index-whatever + % Description. + % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit + % and the "Description." paragraph. + \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi + \else + % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, + % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item + % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. + \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip + \fi +\fi} + % The index entry written in the file actually looks like % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} % or @@ -3131,66 +5500,120 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). % -\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} -\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup +\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% % \smallfonts \rm \tolerance = 9500 - \indexbreaks + \plainfrenchspacing + \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. % % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains % \initial {@} % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). - \catcode`\@ = 11 - \openin 1 \jobname.#1s + \catcode`\@ = 12 + % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. + \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi + \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s \ifeof 1 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure % there is some text. \putwordIndexNonexistent + \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% \else + \catcode`\\ = 0 % % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so % it can discover if there is anything in it. - \read 1 to \temp + \read 1 to \thisline \ifeof 1 \putwordIndexIsEmpty \else % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change % to make right now. - \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% - \catcode`\\ = 0 - \escapechar = `\\ + \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% + \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces + \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. \begindoublecolumns - \input \jobname.#1s + \let\entrywidowpenalty=\indexwidowpenalty + % + % Read input from the index file line by line. + \loopdo + \ifeof1 + \let\firsttoken\relax + \else + \read 1 to \nextline + \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% + \act + \fi + \thisline + % + \ifeof1\else + \let\thisline\nextline + \repeat + %% \enddoublecolumns \fi \fi \closein 1 \endgroup} +\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} +\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} + +\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} +\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} + % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. % Change them to control the appearance of the index. -\def\initial#1{{% - % Some minor font changes for the special characters. -\ifjaTeX - \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\gt\sectt -\else - \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt -\fi +{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 +\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 +\catcode`\$=3 +\gdef\initialglyphs{% + % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the + % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere + % for these characters. + \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% + \let\\=\indexbackslash % + % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash + \catcode`\/=13 + \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% + \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' + \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% + \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% + \def\_{% + \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% + \def|{$\vert$}% + \def<{$\less$}% + \def>{$\gtr$}% + \def+{$\normalplus$}% +}} + +\def\initial{% + \bgroup + \initialglyphs + \initialx +} + +\def\initialx#1{% % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. \removelastskip % % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. - \penalty -300 + % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the + % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. + \nobreak + \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip + \penalty -300 + \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip % % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column @@ -3198,106 +5621,268 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % we need before each entry, but it's better. % % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. - \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip - \leftline{\secbf #1}% - \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip - % + \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip + \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% + % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of + % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that + % \leftline creates. % Do our best not to break after the initial. \nobreak -}} + \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip + \egroup % \initialglyphs +} -% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 -% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents -% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. +\newdimen\entryrightmargin +\entryrightmargin=0pt + +% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and +% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index +% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. % -\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup - % - % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't - % affect previous text. - \par - % - % Do not fill out the last line with white space. - \parfillskip = 0in - % - % No extra space above this paragraph. - \parskip = 0in - % - % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. - \finalhyphendemerits = 0 - % - % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number - % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the - % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large - % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across - % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. - % - % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start - % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. - \hangindent = 2em - % - % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line - % with blank space. - \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil - % - % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns. - \vskip 0pt plus1pt - % - % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking - % parameters we've set above will have an effect. - \noindent - % - % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. - #1% - % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if - % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be - % cursed by a Unix daemon. - \def\tempa{{\rm }}% - \def\tempb{#2}% - \edef\tempc{\tempa}% - \edef\tempd{\tempb}% - \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% +\def\entry{% + \begingroup % - % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out - % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the - % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) - \hfil\penalty50 - \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. + % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. + % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to + % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks + % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertindexentrybox. + \let\domark\relax % - % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as - % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull - % \hbox ensues. - \ifpdf - \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. + % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't + % affect previous text. + \par + % + % No extra space above this paragraph. + \parskip = 0in + % + % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks + % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section + % titles, for instance. + \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% + \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command + % + % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): + \afterassignment\doentry + \let\temp = +} +\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% +\def\doentry{% + % Save the text of the entry + \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup + \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. + \noindent + \aftergroup\finishentry + % And now comes the text of the entry. + % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems + % with catcodes occurring. +} +{\catcode`\@=11 +\gdef\finishentry#1{% + \egroup % end box A + \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry + \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA + % #1 is the page number. + % + % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use + % leaders if they are present. + \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% + \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt + \null\nobreak\hfill\ % \else - \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. + % + \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. + % + \ifpdf + \pdfgettoks#1.% + \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA + \else + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% + \else + \pdfgettoks#1.% + \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA + \fi + \fi \fi - \fi% - \par -\endgroup} + \egroup % end \boxA + \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt + \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% + \else + \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox\bgroup + % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the + % page numbers to be aligned to the right. + % + \parindent = 0pt + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill + \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil + \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill + % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own + % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. + \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill + % + \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin + % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. + % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to + % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. + \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em + \dimen@i=2.1em + \else + \dimen@i=0em + \fi + \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i + % + \dimen@ii = \hsize + \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip + \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin + \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i + \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line + \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text + \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ % Try to split the text roughly evenly + \dimen@ii = \hsize + \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii + % If the entry is too long, use the whole line + \dimen@ = \dimen@ii + \fi + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right + \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip + \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii + % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, + % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX + % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. + % + \leftskip = 1em + \parindent = -1em + \fi\fi + \indent % start paragraph + \unhbox\boxA + % + % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. + \finalhyphendemerits = 0 + % + % Word spacing - no stretch + \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font + % + \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. + \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. + % + \par % format the paragraph + \egroup % The \vbox + \fi + \endgroup + % delay text of entry until after penalty + \bgroup\aftergroup\insertindexentrybox + \entrywidowpenalty +}} -% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. +\newskip\thinshrinkable +\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em + +\newbox\entryindexbox +\def\insertindexentrybox{% + \ourunvbox\entryindexbox +} + +% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box +% to the current vertical list. +\def\ourunvbox#1{% +\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox + % Remove the last box from box #1 + \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% + \unvbox#1% + \unskip % remove any glue + \unpenalty + \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox + }% + \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox + \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else + \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box + \nobreak + \fi + \box\delayedbox +\egroup +} +\newbox\delayedbox +\newbox\interbox + +% Default is no penalty +\let\entrywidowpenalty\egroup + +% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token +% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last +% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage +% widowed index entries. +\long\def\indexwidowpenalty{% + \def\isentry{\entry}% + \ifx\firsttoken\isentry + \else + \penalty 9000 + \fi + \egroup % now comes the box added with \aftergroup +} + +% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. +% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push +% the page number to the right. \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders - \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} + \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} + \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm - -\def\secondary #1#2{ -{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in -\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 -\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par +\def\secondary#1#2{{% + \parfillskip=0in + \parskip=0in + \hangindent=1in + \hangafter=1 + \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill + \ifpdf + \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. + \else + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + #2 + \else + \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. + \fi + \fi + \par }} % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. -\catcode`\@=11 +\catcode`\@=11 % private names \newbox\partialpage \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize +% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark +\def\savemarks{% + \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }% + \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }% +} +\newtoks\savedtopmark +\newtoks\savedfirstmark + +% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs. +% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material +% added while an output routine is active, including +% penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far +% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away. +\def\restoremarks{% + \mark{\the\savedtopmark}% + \bgroup\output = {% + \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE + }abc\eject\egroup + % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page. + \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}% +} + \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns + % If not much space left on page, start a new page. + \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi + % % Grab any single-column material above us. \output = {% % @@ -3317,9 +5902,16 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \unvbox\PAGE \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip }% + \savemarks }% \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage + \restoremarks % + % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order + % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading, + % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output. + % + % % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. \output = {\doublecolumnout}% % @@ -3346,20 +5938,24 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) - \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage \vsize = 2\vsize + % + % For the benefit of balancing columns + \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt } % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except -% the last. +% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. % \def\doublecolumnout{% + % \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the % previous page. \dimen@ = \vsize \divide\dimen@ by 2 + \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage % % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ @@ -3367,32 +5963,64 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty } +% +% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, +% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. \def\pagesofar{% - % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, - % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. \unvbox\partialpage % \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize - \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% + \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% } + + +% Finished with with double columns. \def\enddoublecolumns{% + % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised + % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the + % following situation: + % + % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. + % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no + % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last + % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not + % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following + % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject + % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output + % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last + % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which + % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with + % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as + % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page + % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the + % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page + % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final + % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after + % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns + % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see + % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. + % + % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the + % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). + \penalty0 + % \output = {% - % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the - % current page, no automatic page break. + % Split the last of the double-column material. + \savemarks \balancecolumns % - % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, - % though, there will be another page break right after this \output - % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not + % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal - % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be - % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes - % the output somewhat more palatable.) + % definition right away. \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% }% \eject \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns + \restoremarks + % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic + % page break. + \box\balancedcolumns % % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column @@ -3400,30 +6028,59 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). \pagegoal = \vsize } +\newbox\balancedcolumns +\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% +% +% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout +% does the others. \def\balancecolumns{% - % Called at the end of the double column material. \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. \dimen@ = \ht0 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip - \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to - %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% - \splittopskip = \topskip - % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. - {% - \vbadness = 10000 - \loop - \global\setbox3 = \copy0 - \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ - \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ - \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt - \repeat - }% - %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% - \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% - \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% + \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip + % Don't split a short final column in two. + \setbox2=\vbox{}% + \else + \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to + \dimen@ii = \dimen@ + \splittopskip = \topskip + % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. + {% + \vbadness = 10000 + \loop + \global\setbox3 = \copy0 + \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ + \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 + \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt + \repeat + }% + % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. + % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. + % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so + % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). + \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize + % Just split the last of the double column material roughly in half. + \setbox2=\box0 + \setbox0 = \vsplit2 to \dimen@ii + \setbox0=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox0\vfill}% + \setbox2=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox2\vfill}% + \else + % Compare the heights of the two columns. + \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 + % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms + % flush with each other. + \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% + \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% + \else + % Make column bottoms flush with each other. + \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% + \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% + \fi + \fi + \fi % - \pagesofar + \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% } \catcode`\@ = \other @@ -3431,6 +6088,31 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \message{sectioning,} % Chapters, sections, etc. +% Let's start with @part. +\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} +\def\partzzz#1{% + \chapoddpage + \null + \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit + \begingroup + \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text + \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with + \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc + \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page + % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter + % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. + \let\pchapsepmacro\relax + \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% + \chapoddpage + \endgroup +} + +% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered +% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf +% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter +% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 +% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) +\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 \newcount\chapno \newcount\secno \secno=0 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 @@ -3438,9 +6120,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ +% % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} -% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual +% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple +% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. +% \def\appendixletter{% \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% @@ -3476,13 +6161,18 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} -% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. -% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. +% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number +% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use +% these. @section does likewise. \def\thischapter{} +\def\thischapternum{} +\def\thischaptername{} \def\thissection{} +\def\thissectionnum{} +\def\thissectionname{} \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level -\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count +\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} @@ -3492,337 +6182,315 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name -% Choose a numbered-heading macro -% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections -% #2 is text for heading -\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 -\ifcase\absseclevel - \chapterzzz{#2} -\or - \seczzz{#2} -\or - \numberedsubseczzz{#2} -\or - \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} -\else - \ifnum \absseclevel<0 - \chapterzzz{#2} +% we only have subsub. +\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 +% +% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. +% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: +\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel +% +% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: +% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. +\def\chapheadtype{N} + +% Choose a heading macro +% #1 is heading type +% #2 is heading level +% #3 is text for heading +\def\genhead#1#2#3{% + % Compute the abs. sec. level: + \absseclevel=#2 + \advance\absseclevel by \secbase + % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: + \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 + \absseclevel = 0 \else - \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} + \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 + \absseclevel = 3 + \fi \fi -\fi -} - -% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels -\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 -\ifcase\absseclevel - \appendixzzz{#2} -\or - \appendixsectionzzz{#2} -\or - \appendixsubseczzz{#2} -\or - \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} -\else - \ifnum \absseclevel<0 - \appendixzzz{#2} + % The heading type: + \def\headtype{#1}% + \if \headtype U% + \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel + \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel + \fi \else - \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} + % Check for appendix sections: + \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 + \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% + \else + \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% + \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% + \fi\fi + \fi + % Check for numbered within unnumbered: + \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel + \def\headtype{U}% + \else + \chardef\unnlevel = 3 + \fi \fi -\fi -} - -% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels -\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 -\ifcase\absseclevel - \unnumberedzzz{#2} -\or - \unnumberedseczzz{#2} -\or - \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} -\or - \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} -\else - \ifnum \absseclevel<0 - \unnumberedzzz{#2} + % Now print the heading: + \if \headtype U% + \ifcase\absseclevel + \unnumberedzzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi \else - \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} + \if \headtype A% + \ifcase\absseclevel + \appendixzzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi + \else + \ifcase\absseclevel + \chapterzzz{#3}% + \or \seczzz{#3}% + \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi + \fi \fi -\fi + \suppressfirstparagraphindent } -% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. -\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} -\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} -\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz -\def\chapterzzz #1{% -\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 -\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% -\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% -\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% -% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter -% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. -\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% - {\the\chapno}}}% -\temp -\donoderef -\global\let\section = \numberedsec -\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec -\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec +% an interface: +\def\numhead{\genhead N} +\def\apphead{\genhead A} +\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} + +% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset +% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. +% +% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers +% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. +\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty +% +\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz +\def\chapterzzz#1{% + % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such + % as an @include file. + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\chapno by 1 + % + % Used for \float. + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% + \resetallfloatnos + % + % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. + \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% + \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% + % + % Write the actual heading. + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% + % + % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. + \global\let\section = \numberedsec + \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec } -\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} -\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz -\def\appendixzzz #1{% -\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 -\global\advance \appendixno by 1 -\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% -\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% -\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% -\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% - {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}% -\temp -\appendixnoderef -\global\let\section = \appendixsec -\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec -\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec +\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz +% +\def\appendixzzz#1{% + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\appendixno by 1 + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% + \resetallfloatnos + % + % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. + \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% + \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% + % + \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% + % + \global\let\section = \appendixsec + \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec } +% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: +\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} +\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 + % + % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. + \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty + \resetallfloatnos + % + % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the + % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX + % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX + % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant + % to be executed, not expanded). + % + % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear + % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use + % \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, + % simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for + % the toc entries.) + \toks0 = {#1}% + \message{(\the\toks0)}% + % + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% + % + \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec + \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec +} + % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. -\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} -\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} +\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters + \unnmhead0{#1}% + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax +} % @top is like @unnumbered. -\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} +\let\top\unnumbered -\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} -\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz -\def\unnumberedzzz #1{% -\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 -% -% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the -% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX -% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX -% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant -% to be executed, not expanded). -% -% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear -% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use -% \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, -% simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for -% the toc entries.) -\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% -% -\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% -\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}% -\temp -\unnumbnoderef -\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec -\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec -\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec -} - % Sections. -\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} -\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz -\def\seczzz #1{% -\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % -\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% - {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}% -\temp -\donoderef -\nobreak +% +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz +\def\seczzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% } -\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} -\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} -\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz -\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% -\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % -\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% - {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}% -\temp -\appendixnoderef -\nobreak +% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} +\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% } +\let\appendixsec\appendixsection -\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} -\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz -\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% -\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}% -\temp -\unnumbnoderef -\nobreak +% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} +\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% } % Subsections. -\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} -\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz -\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% -\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % -\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% - {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% -\temp -\donoderef -\nobreak +% +% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} +\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } -\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} -\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz -\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% -\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % -\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% - {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% -\temp -\appendixnoderef -\nobreak +% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} +\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } -\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} -\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz -\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% -\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry% - {\the\toks0}}}% -\temp -\unnumbnoderef -\nobreak +% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} +\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } % Subsubsections. -\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} -\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz -\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% -\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % -\subsubsecheading {#1} - {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% - {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% -\temp -\donoderef -\nobreak +% +% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} +\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% + {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } -\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} -\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz -\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% -\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % -\subsubsecheading {#1} - {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% - {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% -\temp -\appendixnoderef -\nobreak +% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} +\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } -\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} -\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz -\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% -\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% -\toks0 = {#1}% -\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry% - {\the\toks0}}}% -\temp -\unnumbnoderef -\nobreak +% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} +\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } -% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. -% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. -\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} -\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} -\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} -\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} -\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} - -\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} -\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} -\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} -\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} - -\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} -\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} -\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} -\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} - % These macros control what the section commands do, according % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. -\global\let\section = \numberedsec -\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec -\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec +\let\section = \numberedsec +\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec +\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading -% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: -% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit -% overlong headings to fold. -% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a -% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. -% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and -% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. +\def\majorheading{% + {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% + \parsearg\chapheadingzzz +} +\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} +\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% + \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% + \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak + \suppressfirstparagraphindent +} -\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} -\def\majorheadingzzz #1{% -{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% -{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 - \parindent=0pt\raggedright - \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} - -\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} -\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % -{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 - \parindent=0pt\raggedright - \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} - % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. -\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading} -\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading} -\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading} +\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} +\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} +\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. -%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) +% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} -\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} - -%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) - \newskip\chapheadingskip +% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} + +% Start a new page \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} -\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} -\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} +% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter +% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will +% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't +% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. +\def\chapoddpage{% + \chappager + \ifodd\pageno \else + \begingroup + \headingsoff + \null + \chappager + \endgroup + \fi +} +\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} + \def\CHAPPAGoff{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak @@ -3834,7 +6502,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} -\def\CHAPPAGodd{ +\def\CHAPPAGodd{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage @@ -3842,107 +6510,286 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \CHAPPAGon -\def\CHAPFplain{ -\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain -\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain -\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} - -% Plain chapter opening. -% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered. -\def\chfplain#1#2{% +% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. +% +% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, +% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. +% Not used for @heading series. +% +% To test against our argument. +\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} +\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} +\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} +% +\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% + \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else + \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. + \fi + % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when + % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but + % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print + % in chapter size. + % + % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). + \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs + \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% + \gdef\thissection{}}% + % + \def\temptype{#2}% + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% + \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% + \gdef\thischapter{}}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \toks0={#1}% + \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% + \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% + \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% + % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible + % commands in some of the translations. + \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} + \noexpand\thischapternum: + \noexpand\thischaptername}% + }% + \else + \toks0={#1}% + \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% + \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% + \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% + % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible + % commands in some of the translations. + \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} + \noexpand\thischapternum: + \noexpand\thischaptername}% + }% + \fi\fi\fi + % + % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of + % the preceding space. + \safewhatsit\domark + % + % Insert the chapter heading break. \pchapsepmacro + % + % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points + % between here and the heading. + \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs + \domark + % {% - \chapfonts \rm - \def\chapnum{#2}% - \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% - \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright - \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe + \chapfonts \rmisbold + \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message + % + % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the + % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called + % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. + \gdef\lastsection{#1}% + % + % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix + % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{unnchap}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry + \def\toctype{omit}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% + \def\toctype{app}% + \else + \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% + \def\toctype{numchap}% + \fi\fi\fi + % + % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the + % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc + % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. + \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% + % + % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make + % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has + % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the + % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not + % being visible, for instance under high magnification. + \donoderef{#2}% + % + % Typeset the actual heading. + \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. + \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe \unhbox0 #1\par}% }% \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title \nobreak } -% Plain opening for unnumbered. -\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} - % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax -\def\centerchfplain#1{{% - \def\centerparametersmaybe{% - \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip - \leftskip = \rightskip - \parfillskip = 0pt - }% - \chfplain{#1}{}% -}} - -\CHAPFplain % The default - -\def\unnchfopen #1{% -\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 - \parindent=0pt\raggedright - \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak +\def\centerparameters{% + \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip + \leftskip = \rightskip + \parfillskip = 0pt } -\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts -\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% -\par\penalty 5000 % -} -\def\centerchfopen #1{% -\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 - \parindent=0pt - \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak -} - -\def\CHAPFopen{ -\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen -\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen -\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} - - -% Section titles. +% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and +% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. +% \newskip\secheadingskip -\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} -\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} -\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} +\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} % Subsection titles. -\newskip \subsecheadingskip -\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} -\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} -\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} +\newskip\subsecheadingskip +\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} % Subsubsection titles. -\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip -\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak -\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} -\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} +\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} +\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} -% Print any size section title. +% Print any size, any type, section title. % -% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section -% number (maybe empty), #3 the text. -\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% +% #1 is the text of the title, +% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), +% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), +% #4 is the section number. +% +\def\seckeyword{sec} +% +\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% {% - \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip - \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname - }% - {% + \def\sectionlevel{#2}% + \def\temptype{#3}% + % + % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an + % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is + % dubious), but not the others. + \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else + \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. + \fi + \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading + % % Switch to the right set of fonts. - \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm + \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold % - % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number. - \def\secnum{#2}% - \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% + % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword + \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% + \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% + \fi + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + % Don't redefine \thissection. + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword + \toks0={#1}% + \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% + % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible + % commands in some of the translations. + \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} + \noexpand\thissectionnum: + \noexpand\thissectionname}% + }% + \fi + \else + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword + \toks0={#1}% + \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% + % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible + % commands in some of the translations. + \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} + \noexpand\thissectionnum: + \noexpand\thissectionname}% + }% + \fi + \fi\fi\fi % - \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright - \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number - \unhbox0 #3}% + % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we + % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph + % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. + \par + % + % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of + % the preceding space. + \safewhatsit\domark + % + % Insert space above the heading. + \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname + % + % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points + % between here and the heading. + \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs + \domark + % + % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{unn}% + \gdef\lastsection{#1}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, + % and don't redefine \lastsection. + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{omit}% + \let\sectionlevel=\empty + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% + \def\toctype{app}% + \gdef\lastsection{#1}% + \else + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% + \def\toctype{num}% + \gdef\lastsection{#1}% + \fi\fi\fi + % + % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. + \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% + % + % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). + % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. + \donoderef{#3}% + % + % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. + % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be + % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the + % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that + % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the + % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. + \nobreak + % + % Output the actual section heading. + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright + \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number + \unhbox0 #1}% }% - \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak + % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. + % Don't allow stretch, though. + \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname + % + % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it + % was followed by glue. + \nobreak + % + % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that + % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a + % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next + % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out + % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically + % obscuring the section heading with something else. + \vskip-\parskip + % + % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known + % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation + % and do the needful. + \penalty 10001 } @@ -3951,170 +6798,245 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \newwrite\tocfile % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. -% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the -% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro. +% Called from @chapter, etc. % -% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other -% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere. +% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} +% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional +% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually +% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the +% destination to jump to. % +% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or +% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. +% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the +% table of contents chapter openings themselves. +% \newif\iftocfileopened -\def\writetocentry#1{% - \iftocfileopened\else - \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc - \global\tocfileopenedtrue +\def\omitkeyword{omit}% +% +\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% + \edef\writetoctype{#1}% + \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else + \iftocfileopened\else + \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc + \global\tocfileopenedtrue + \fi + % + \iflinks + {\atdummies + \edef\temp{% + \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% + \temp + }% + \fi \fi - \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi + % + % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're + % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't + % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered + % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first + % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named + % `1', and two named `2'. + \ifpdf + \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue + \else + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \else + \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue + \fi + \fi } + +% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman +% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant +% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. +% +\def\activecatcodes{% + \catcode`\"=\active + \catcode`\$=\active + \catcode`\<=\active + \catcode`\>=\active + \catcode`\\=\active + \catcode`\^=\active + \catcode`\_=\active + \catcode`\|=\active + \catcode`\~=\active +} + + +% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. +\def\readtocfile{% + \setupdatafile + \activecatcodes + \input \tocreadfilename +} + \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in \newcount\savepageno \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 -% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written -% to \tocfile. +% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. % \def\startcontents#1{% - % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should - % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain - % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. - % From: Torbjorn Granlund - \contentsalignmacro - \immediate\closeout\tocfile - % - % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. - % It is abundantly clear what they are. - \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% - \savepageno = \pageno - \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. - \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 - % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section - % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. - %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi - \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. - \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. - % - % Roman numerals for page numbers. - \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi + % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should + % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain + % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. + % From: Torbjorn Granlund + \contentsalignmacro + \immediate\closeout\tocfile + % + % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. + % It is abundantly clear what they are. + \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% + % + \savepageno = \pageno + \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. + \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. + \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. + % + % Roman numerals for page numbers. + \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi } +% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on +% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. +% +\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} % Normal (long) toc. +% \def\contents{% - \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% - \openin 1 \jobname.toc - \ifeof 1 \else - \closein 1 - \input \jobname.toc - \fi - \vfill \eject - \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect - \pdfmakeoutlines - \endgroup - \lastnegativepageno = \pageno - \pageno = \savepageno + \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% + \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space + \ifeof 1 \else + \readtocfile + \fi + \vfill \eject + \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect + \ifeof 1 \else + \pdfmakeoutlines + \fi + \closein 1 + \endgroup + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno + \global\pageno = \savepageno } % And just the chapters. \def\summarycontents{% - \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% - % - \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry - \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry - % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. - \secfonts - \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl -\ifjaTeX - \let\mc=\shortcontmc \let\gt=\shortcontgt - \mc\rm -\else - \rm -\fi - \hyphenpenalty = 10000 - \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. - \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} - \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} - \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} - \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} - \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} - \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} - \openin 1 \jobname.toc - \ifeof 1 \else - \closein 1 - \input \jobname.toc - \fi - \vfill \eject - \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect - \endgroup - \lastnegativepageno = \pageno - \pageno = \savepageno + \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% + % + \let\partentry = \shortpartentry + \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry + \let\appentry = \shortchapentry + \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry + % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. + \secfonts + \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf + \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt + \rm + \hyphenpenalty = 10000 + \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} + \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry + \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space + \ifeof 1 \else + \readtocfile + \fi + \closein 1 + \vfill \eject + \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect + \endgroup + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno + \global\pageno = \savepageno } \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents -\ifpdf - \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% -\fi +% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. +% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. +% +\def\shortchaplabel#1{% + % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the + % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. + % But use \hss just in case. + % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after + % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) + % + % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange + % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and + % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 + % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters + % there are before deciding ... + \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% +} % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. % The first argument is the chapter or section name. % The last argument is the page number. % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... -% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. -\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} +% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't +% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. +% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. +\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} +\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} +% +% Parts, in the short toc. +\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% + \penalty-300 + \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip + \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% +} -% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings -\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% - \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}% +% Chapters, in the main contents. +\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} + +% Chapters, in the short toc. +% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. +\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% + \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% } -% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. -% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. -% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry -% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry -% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. +% Appendices, in the main contents. +% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. % -\newdimen\shortappendixwidth +\def\appendixbox#1{% + % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. + \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% + \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} % -\def\shortchaplabel#1{% - % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language. - \ifjaTeX - \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontmc\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } - \else - \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } - \fi - \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 - % - % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of - % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. - \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% - \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi - % - % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the - % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. - % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after - % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) - \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em - \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% -} +\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} -\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} -\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}} +% Unnumbered chapters. +\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} +\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} % Sections. -\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} -\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} +\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} +\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry +\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} % Subsections. -\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} -\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} +\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} +\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry +\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % And subsubsections. -\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} -\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} +\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} +\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry +\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. -\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc +% Same as \defaultparindent. +\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the % page number. @@ -4124,6 +7046,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \def\dochapentry#1#2{% \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip \begingroup + % Move the page numbers slightly to the right + \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em \chapentryfonts \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup @@ -4145,17 +7069,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} -% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for -% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We -% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist -% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) -\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup - \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks - % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is - % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we - % have to do the usual translation tricks. - \entry{#1}{#2}% -\endgroup} +% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. +\let\tocentry = \entry % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} @@ -4165,74 +7080,36 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} -\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts -\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts +\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} +\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} \message{environments,} % @foo ... @end foo. -% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of -% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. -% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. -\newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox -\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox -\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox - -%{\tentt -%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} -%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} -%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} -%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} -% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) -%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex -% depth .1ex\hfil} -%} - -% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. -\def\point{$\star$} -\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} -\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} -\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} -\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} - -% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. -{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. -\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules -% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) -\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} - -\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil - \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. - \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. - \vbox{ - \hrule height\dimen2 - \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. - \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. - \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. - \hrule height\dimen2} - \hfil} - -% The @error{} command. -\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} - -% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. +% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. -% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. +% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. -\def\tex{\begingroup +\envdef\tex{% + \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 - \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie + \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie \catcode `\%=14 - \catcode 43=12 % plus - \catcode`\"=12 - \catcode`\==12 - \catcode`\|=12 - \catcode`\<=12 - \catcode`\>=12 - \escapechar=`\\ + \catcode `\+=\other + \catcode `\"=\other + \catcode `\|=\other + \catcode `\<=\other + \catcode `\>=\other + \catcode `\`=\other + \catcode `\'=\other % + % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our + % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. + \mathactive + % + % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. \let\b=\ptexb \let\bullet=\ptexbullet \let\c=\ptexc @@ -4242,20 +7119,28 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \let\equiv=\ptexequiv \let\!=\ptexexclam \let\i=\ptexi + \let\indent=\ptexindent + \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent \let\{=\ptexlbrace \let\+=\tabalign \let\}=\ptexrbrace + \let\/=\ptexslash + \let\sp=\ptexsp \let\*=\ptexstar + %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode \let\t=\ptext + \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer + \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing % \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% \def\@{@}% -\let\Etex=\endgroup} +} +% There is no need to define \Etex. -% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. -% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, -% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). +% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. +% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, +% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in @@ -4265,34 +7150,50 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % have any width. \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} -% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword -% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this -% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input -% should produce a line of output anyway. -% -{\obeyspaces % -\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} - -% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is -% for use in \parsearg. -{\sepspaces% -\global\let\obeyedspace= } - % This space is always present above and below environments. \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the -% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip +% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. % -\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip -\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount -\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} +\def\aboveenvbreak{{% + % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and + % \sectionheading, q.v. + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else + \advance\envskipamount by \parskip + \endgraf + \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount + \removelastskip + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 + % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text + % often leads into it. + \penalty100 + \fi + \vskip\envskipamount + \fi + \fi +}} -\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak +\def\afterenvbreak{{% + % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and + % \sectionheading, q.v. + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else + \advance\envskipamount by \parskip + \endgraf + \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount + \removelastskip + % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak + % or better ... + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi + \vskip\envskipamount + \fi + \fi +}} -% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. +% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will +% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. \let\nonarrowing=\relax % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around @@ -4316,782 +7217,936 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip -\long\def\cartouche{% -\begingroup - \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip - \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. - \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip - \advance\cartinner by-\rskip - \cartouter=\hsize - \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either -% side, and for 6pt waste from -% each corner char, and rule thickness - \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip - % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. - \let\nonarrowing=\comment - \vbox\bgroup - \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt - \carttop - \hbox\bgroup - \hskip\lskip - \vrule\kern3pt - \vbox\bgroup - \hsize=\cartinner - \kern3pt - \begingroup - \baselineskip=\normbskip - \lineskip=\normlskip - \parskip=\normpskip - \vskip -\parskip +\envdef\cartouche{% + \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. + \startsavinginserts + \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip + \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. + \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip + \advance\cartinner by-\rskip + \cartouter=\hsize + \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either + % side, and for 6pt waste from + % each corner char, and rule thickness + \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip + % + % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the + % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can + % collide with the section heading. + \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi + % + \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup + \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt + \carttop + \hbox\bgroup + \hskip\lskip + \vrule\kern3pt + \vbox\bgroup + \kern3pt + \hsize=\cartinner + \baselineskip=\normbskip + \lineskip=\normlskip + \parskip=\normpskip + \vskip -\parskip + \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. +} \def\Ecartouche{% - \endgroup - \kern3pt - \egroup - \kern3pt\vrule - \hskip\rskip - \egroup - \cartbot - \egroup -\endgroup -}} + \ifhmode\par\fi + \kern3pt + \egroup + \kern3pt\vrule + \hskip\rskip + \egroup + \cartbot + \egroup + \addgroupbox + \checkinserts +} % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, % inside a group. +\newdimen\nonfillparindent \def\nonfillstart{% \aboveenvbreak - \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body - \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy + \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. - \singlespace \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output \parskip = 0pt + % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate + % the normal \indent. + \nonfillparindent=\parindent \parindent = 0pt + \let\indent\nonfillindent + % \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes - % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing - % at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing - \let\exdent=\nofillexdent - \let\nonarrowing=\relax + \else + \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi + \let\exdent=\nofillexdent } -% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular -% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. +\begingroup +\obeyspaces +% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake +% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally +% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after +% @indent. +\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% +\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% +\ifx\temp % +\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% +\else% +\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% +\fi% +}% +\endgroup +\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} +\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} + +% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. +% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. +% This affects the following displayed environments: +% @example, @display, @format, @lisp % -% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via -% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep -% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be -% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after -% the environment. -% -\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} +\def\smallword{small} +\def\nosmallword{nosmall} +\let\SETdispenvsize\relax +\def\setnormaldispenv{% + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword + % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank + % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but + % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient + % to change the fonts afterward. + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi + \smallexamplefonts \rm + \fi +} +\def\setsmalldispenv{% + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword + \else + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi + \smallexamplefonts \rm + \fi +} -% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font. -\def\lisp{\begingroup - \nonfillstart - \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish - \tt - \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. - \gobble % eat return +% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. +% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. +\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% + \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% + \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% + \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak + \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak } -% @example: Same as @lisp. -\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} - -% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook -% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the -% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or -% whatever) command. +% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. +\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% + \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% + \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% +} % -% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an -% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway. +% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; +% @example: same as @lisp. % -\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display} -\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} -\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} -\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} - -% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts. +% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. -\def\smalllispx{\begingroup - \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% - \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% - \smallfonts - \lisp +% +\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% + \nonfillstart + \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% + \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. + \gobble % eat return } - -% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font. +% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. % -\def\display{\begingroup +\makedispenvdef{display}{% \nonfillstart - \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish \gobble } -% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts. +% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. % -\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup - \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% - \smallfonts \rm - \display +\makedispenvdef{format}{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \gobble } -% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins. -% -\def\format{\begingroup - \let\nonarrowing = t +% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. +\envdef\flushleft{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart - \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish \gobble } +\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak -% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts. +% @flushright. % -\def\smallformatx{\begingroup - \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% - \smallfonts \rm - \format +\envdef\flushright{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax + \gobble } +\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak -% @flushleft (same as @format). + +% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right +% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special +% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right +% should be enough. +\envdef\raggedright{% + \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax + \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% + \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% +} +\let\Eraggedright\par + +\envdef\raggedleft{% + \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em + \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt + \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off + % badness reporting. +} +\let\Eraggedleft\par + +\envdef\raggedcenter{% + \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em + \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt + \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off + % badness reporting. +} +\let\Eraggedcenter\par + + +% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) +% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since +% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and +% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. % -\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} +\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} +% +\def\quotationstart{% + \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax + \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing + \fi + \parsearg\quotationlabel +} -% @flushright. +% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're +% doing normal filling. % -\def\flushright{\begingroup - \let\nonarrowing = t - \nonfillstart - \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish - \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill - \gobble +\def\Equotation{% + \par + \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else + % indent a bit. + \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% + \fi + {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% } +\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} -% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) -% and narrows the margins. +% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. +\def\quotationlabel#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\empty \else + {\bf #1: }% + \fi +} + +% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and +% has no optional argument. +% +\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} % -\def\quotation{% - \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body +\def\indentedblockstart{% {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip - \singlespace \parindent=0pt - % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're - % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... - \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% % % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing - \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing + \else \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi } +% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. +% +\def\Eindentedblock{% + \par + {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% +} +\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} -\message{defuns,} -% @defun etc. -% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally -\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} - -\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in -\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt -\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt -\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt - -\newcount\parencount -% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. -% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. -\def\activeparens{% -\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active -\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} - -% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. -\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) - -{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) - -% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, -% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, -% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. -\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen -\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack - -\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } -\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} -% This is used to turn on special parens -% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). -\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} - -% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. -% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. -\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested - \global\advance\parencount by 1 +% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{...} +% If we want to allow any as delimiter, +% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: +% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org +% +% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. +% +% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets +% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a +% verbatim line. +\def\dospecials{% + \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% + \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% + \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% + % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and + % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and + % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. + %\do\`\do\'% } % -% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. -\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } +% [Knuth] p. 380 +\def\uncatcodespecials{% + \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} % -\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. - % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. - \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi - \global\advance \parencount by -1 } -% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards -\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } +% Setup for the @verb command. % -\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} -} % End of definition inside \activeparens -%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the -%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] -\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } -\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } -\let\ampnr = \& -\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} -\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} - -% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined. -{ - \catcode`& = 13 - \global\let& = \ampnr +% Eight spaces for a tab +\begingroup + \catcode`\^^I=\active + \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} +\endgroup +% +\def\setupverb{% + \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim + \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% + \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% + \tabeightspaces + % Respect line breaks, + % print special symbols as themselves, and + % make each space count + % must do in this order: + \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces } -% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. -% #1 should be the function name. -% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". +% Setup for the @verbatim environment +% +% Real tab expansion. +\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount +% +% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle +% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, +% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the +% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before +% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands +% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. +\newbox\verbbox +\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} +% +\begingroup + \catcode`\^^I=\active + \gdef\tabexpand{% + \catcode`\^^I=\active + \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup + \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab + \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw + \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw + \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw + \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox + }% + } +\endgroup -\def\defname #1#2{% -% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were -% outside the @def... -\dimen2=\leftskip -\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent -\noindent -\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% -\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line -\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations -\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 -% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) -% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, -% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking -{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, -% so that \rightline will obey them. -\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 -\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}% -% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: -\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 -\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name +% start the verbatim environment. +\def\setupverbatim{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim + % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would + % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. + \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% + \tabexpand + \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% + % Respect line breaks, + % print special symbols as themselves, and + % make each space count. + % Must do in this order: + \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces + \everypar{\starttabbox}% } -% Actually process the body of a definition -% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. -% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. -% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, -% such as \defunheader. +% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique +% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a +% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: +% +% \def\doverb'{'#1'}'{#1} +% +% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} +\begingroup + \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other + \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] +\endgroup +% +\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} +% +% +% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that +% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: +% +% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} +% +% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, +% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': +% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. +% +% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] +% +\begingroup + \catcode`\ =\active + \obeylines % + % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end + % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank + % line in the output. + \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% + % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but + % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. +\endgroup +% +\envdef\verbatim{% + \setupverbatim\doverbatim +} +\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak -\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody -\medbreak % -% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies -% so that it will exit this group. -\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% -\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% -\parindent=0in -\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -\begingroup % -\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' -\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} -% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). -% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). -% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. -% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. +% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. % -\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % -\medbreak % -% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies -% so that it will exit this group. -\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% -\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% -\parindent=0in -\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} +\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} +% +\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \setupverbatim + \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. + \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% + \input #1 + \afterenvbreak + }% +} -% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar. -% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). -% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). -% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. -% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name. -% #5 is the method's return type. +% @copying ... @end copying. +% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. % -\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV - \medbreak - \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% - \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% - \parindent=0in - \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent - \exdentamount=\defbodyindent - \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}} +% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. +% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the +% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done +% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source +% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as +% possible is desirable. +% +\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} +\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} +% +\def\insertcopying{% + \begingroup + \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page + \scanexp\copyingtext + \endgroup +} -% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an -% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it -% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have -% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the -% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for -% the \E... definition to assign the category name to. -% -\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV - \medbreak - \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% - \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {% - \def#4{##1}% - \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}% - \parindent=0in - \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent - \exdentamount=\defbodyindent - \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}} -\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % -\medbreak % -% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies -% so that it will exit this group. -\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% -\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% -\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% -\parindent=0in -\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} +\message{defuns,} +% @defun etc. -% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones -% except that they do not make parens into active characters. -% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. +\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in +\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt +\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt +\newcount\defunpenalty -\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody -\medbreak % -% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies -% so that it will exit this group. -\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% -\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% -\parindent=0in -\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -\begingroup % -\catcode 61=\active % -\obeylines\spacesplit#3} - -% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for -% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. -% -\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% - \begingroup\inENV % - \medbreak % - % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies - % so that it will exit this group. - \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% - \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% +% Start the processing of @deffn: +\def\startdefun{% + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 + \medbreak + \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the + % following @def command, see below. + \else + % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, + % which is there to keep the function description together with its + % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a + % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted + % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning + % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow + % a break between a section heading and a defun. + % + % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling + % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the + % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following + % @def command. + \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi + % + % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. + % But do insert the glue. + \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint + \fi + % \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent - \begingroup\obeylines } -\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% - \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% +\def\dodefunx#1{% + % First, check whether we are in the right environment: + \checkenv#1% + % + % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. + % It's not a great place, though. + \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi + % + % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: + \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% } +\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} -% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the -% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct -% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh. -% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody +% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} % -% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That -% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and -% won't strip off the braces. -% -\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% - \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty +\def\printdefunline#1#2{% + \begingroup + % call \deffnheader: + #1#2 \endheader + % common ending: + \interlinepenalty = 10000 + \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax + \endgraf + \nobreak\vskip -\parskip + \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx + % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, + % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. + \checkparencounts + \endgroup } -% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the -% braces (if any). That's what this does. +\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} + +% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; +% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. % -\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} +\def\makedefun#1{% + \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun + \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun + \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% + \temp +} -% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final -% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 -% (which might be empty) the arguments. +% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } % -\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% - #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% -}% +% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. +% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. +% +\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% + \envdef#1{% + \startdefun + \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else + \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% + }% + \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% + \def#3% +} -\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % -\medbreak % -% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies -% so that it will exit this group. -\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% -\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% -\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% -\parindent=0in -\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent -\exdentamount=\defbodyindent -\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} +\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? +\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? -% Split up #2 at the first space token. -% call #1 with two arguments: -% the first is all of #2 before the space token, -% the second is all of #2 after that space token. -% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg -% and the second is passed as empty. +% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions +% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, +% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. +% +\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\onword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname + = \empty + \else\ifx\temp\offword + \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname + = \relax + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', + must be on|off}% + \fi\fi +} -{\obeylines -\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% -\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% -\ifx\relax #3% -#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} +% Untyped functions: -% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. +% @deffn category name args +\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} -% Define @defun. +% @deffn category class name args +\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} -% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun -% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up +% \defopon {category on}class name args +\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } -\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl -% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. -% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. -% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro. -{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}% -#1% -{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}% -\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% -\interlinepenalty=10000 -\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil -\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak +% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args +% +\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% + % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% + \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% } -\def\deftypefunargs #1{% -% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. -% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. -% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. -\boldbraxnoamp -\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars -\interlinepenalty=10000 -\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil -\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak -} +% Typed functions: -% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. +% @deftypefn category type name args +\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} -% @deffn Command forward-char nchars +% @deftypeop category class type name args +\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} -\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} +% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args +\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } -\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% -\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args +% +\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% + \doingtypefntrue + \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } -% @defun == @deffn Function +% Typed variables: -\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} +% @deftypevr category type var args +\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} -\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}% -\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody -} +% @deftypecv category class type var args +\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} -% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) +% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args +\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } -\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} - -% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args. -\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} -% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. -\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% -\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}% -\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args +% +\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% + \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% + \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } -% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) +% Untyped variables: -\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} +% @defvr category var args +\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } -% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ -% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. -\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} +% @defcv category class var args +\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} -% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args. -\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} -% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. -\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% -\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup -\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents -% at least some C++ text from working -\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% -\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody -} +% \defcvof {category of}class var args +\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } -% @defmac == @deffn Macro +% Types: -\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} - -\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}% -\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +% @deftp category name args +\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% + \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% + \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% } -% @defspec == @deffn Special Form +% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: +\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } +\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } +\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } +\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } +\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } +\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } +\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } +\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} +\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} +\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} +\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} -\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} - -\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}% -\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % -\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody -} - -% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG... +% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). +% #1 is the category, such as "Function". +% #2 is the return type, if any. +% #3 is the function name. % -\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% -\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} +% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. % -\def\defopheader#1#2#3{% -\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index -\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}% -\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % +\def\defname#1#2#3{% + \par + % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... + \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent + % + % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function + % on a line by itself. + \rettypeownlinefalse + \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? + % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else + \rettypeownlinetrue + \fi + \fi + % + % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps + % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line + % just below it. + \def\temp{#1}% + \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} + % + % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at + % least two. + \tempnum = 2 + % + % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, + % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: + \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip + % + % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. + \ifrettypeownline + \advance\tempnum by 1 + \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% + \else + \def\maybeshapeline{}% + \fi + % + % The continuations: + \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent + % + % The final paragraph shape: + \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 + % + % Put the category name at the right margin. + \noindent + \hbox to 0pt{% + \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize + % \hsize has to be shortened this way: + \kern\leftskip + % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. + }% + % + % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: + \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 + \exdentamount=\defbodyindent + {% + % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: + % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. + % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's + % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in + % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. + % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. + % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no + % one has made identifiers using them :). + \df \tt + \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type + \ifx\temp\empty\else + \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type + \ifrettypeownline + % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: + \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break + \else + \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space + \fi + \fi % no return type + #3% output function name + }% + {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm + % + \boldbrax + % arguments will be output next, if any. } -% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG... +% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using +% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in +% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very +% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. % -\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}% - \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader - \deftypeopcategory} -% -% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args. -\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{% - \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index - \begingroup - \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3} - {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}% - \deftypefunargs{#4}% - \endgroup +\def\defunargs#1{% + % use sl by default (not ttsl), + % tt for the names. + \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 + % + % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we + % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so + % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. + % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen + % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. + \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% + #1% + \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 } -% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG... +% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. % -\def\deftypemethod{% - \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader} -% -% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args. -\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% - \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index - \begingroup - \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% - \deftypefunargs{#4}% - \endgroup +\def\activeparens{% + \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active + \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active + \catcode`\&=\active } -% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME -% -\def\deftypeivar{% - \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader} -% -% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name. -\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{% - \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index - \begingroup - \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}% - \defvarargs{#3}% - \endgroup -} +% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. +\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) -% @defmethod == @defop Method -% -\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} -% -% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args. -\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% - \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index - \begingroup - \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% - \defunargs{#3}% - \endgroup +% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, +% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, +% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. +{ + \activeparens + \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen + \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack + \global\let& = \& + + \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} + \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} } -% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag +\newcount\parencount -\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% -\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} +% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards +\newif\ifampseen +\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} -\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% -\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index -\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}% -\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % +\def\parenfont{% + \ifampseen + % At the first level, print parens in roman, + % otherwise use the default font. + \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi + \else + % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than + % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . + \sf + \fi } +\def\infirstlevel#1{% + \ifampseen + \ifnum\parencount=1 + #1% + \fi + \fi +} +\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} -% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME -% -\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} -% -\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{% - \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index - \begingroup - \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}% - \defvarargs{#3}% - \endgroup +\def\opnr{% + \global\advance\parencount by 1 + {\parenfont(}% + \infirstlevel \bfafterword } +\def\clnr{% + {\parenfont)}% + \infirstlevel \sl + \global\advance\parencount by -1 +} -% @defvar -% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. -% This is actually simple: just print them in roman. -% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up -\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% -\interlinepenalty=10000 -\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak} - -% @defvr Counter foo-count - -\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} - -\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% -\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} - -% @defvar == @defvr Variable - -\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} - -\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index -\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}% -\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % +\newcount\brackcount +\def\lbrb{% + \global\advance\brackcount by 1 + {\bf[}% } +\def\rbrb{% + {\bf]}% + \global\advance\brackcount by -1 +} -% @defopt == @defvr {User Option} - -\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} - -\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index -\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}% -\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % +\def\checkparencounts{% + \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi + \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi } +% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually +% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). +\def\badparencount{% + \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% + \global\parencount=0 +} +\def\badbrackcount{% + \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% + \global\brackcount=0 +} -% @deftypevar int foobar -\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} +\message{macros,} +% @macro. -% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that -% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. -\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% -\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index -\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}% -\interlinepenalty=10000 -\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak -\endgroup} -\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} +% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, +% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. +\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined + \newwrite\macscribble + \def\scantokens#1{% + \toks0={#1}% + \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp + \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% + \immediate\closeout\macscribble + \input \jobname.tmp + } +\fi -% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable +\let\aftermacroxxx\relax +\def\aftermacro{\aftermacroxxx} -\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} +% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math +\let\texinfoc=\c -\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% -\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} -\interlinepenalty=10000 -\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak -\endgroup} +\newcount\savedcatcodeone +\newcount\savedcatcodetwo -% Now define @deftp -% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. +% Used at the time of macro expansion. +% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted +\def\scanmacro#1{% + \newlinechar`\^^M + \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% + % + % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to + % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when + % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. + \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ + \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ + \catcode`\@=0 + \catcode`\\=\active + % + % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. + \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}\aftermacro% + % + \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone + \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo + % + % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and + % can be noticed by \parsearg. + % The \aftermacro allows a \comment at the end of the macro definition + % to duplicate itself past the final \newlinechar added by \scantokens: + % this is used in the definition of \group to comment out a newline. We + % don't do the same for \c to support Texinfo files with macros that ended + % with a @c, which should no longer be necessary. + % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup + % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. +} -\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} - -% @deftp Class window height width ... - -\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} - -\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% -\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} - -% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.) -% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. -% -\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} -\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} -\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} -\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} -\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} -\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} -\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} -\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} -\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} -\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} -\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} -\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} -\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} - - -\message{macros,} -% @macro. - -% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, -% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. -\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined - \newwrite\macscribble - \def\scanmacro#1{% - \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M - % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex - \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ - % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. - \toks0={#1\endinput}% - \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp - \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% - \immediate\closeout\macscribble - \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces - \input \jobname.tmp - \endgroup +% Used for copying and captions +\def\scanexp#1{% + \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% } -\else -\def\scanmacro#1{% -\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M -% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex -\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ -\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup} -\fi \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters \newtoks\macname % Macro name \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? -\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form - % \do\macro1\do\macro2... +% List of all defined macros in the form +% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... +% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split +% if there is a need. +\def\macrolist{} + +% Add the macro to \macrolist +\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} +\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% + \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% + \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% +} + % Utility routines. -% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. +% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, +% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname +% (except of course we have to play expansion games). +% \def\cslet#1#2{% -\expandafter\expandafter -\expandafter\let -\expandafter\expandafter -\csname#1\endcsname -\csname#2\endcsname} + \expandafter\let + \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname + \csname#2\endcsname +} % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). @@ -5104,7 +8159,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi } % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. -{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3% +{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% @@ -5112,443 +8167,977 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active -% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. - +% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ +% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. +% +% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate +% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to +% confine the change to the current group. +% % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is -% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro +% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. +% +\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine + \catcode`\"=\other + \catcode`\+=\other + \catcode`\<=\other + \catcode`\>=\other + \catcode`\^=\other + \catcode`\_=\other + \catcode`\|=\other + \catcode`\~=\other + \passthroughcharstrue +} -\def\macrobodyctxt{% - \catcode`\~=12 - \catcode`\^=12 - \catcode`\_=12 - \catcode`\|=12 - \catcode`\<=12 - \catcode`\>=12 - \catcode`\+=12 - \catcode`\{=12 - \catcode`\}=12 - \catcode`\@=12 - \catcode`\^^M=12 - \usembodybackslash} +\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. + \scanctxt + \catcode`\@=\other + \catcode`\\=\other + \catcode`\^^M=\other +} +\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions + \scanctxt + \catcode`\ =\other + \catcode`\@=\other + \catcode`\{=\other + \catcode`\}=\other + \catcode`\^^M=\other + \usembodybackslash +} + +% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode +% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside +% an argument to another Texinfo command. \def\macroargctxt{% - \catcode`\~=12 - \catcode`\^=12 - \catcode`\_=12 - \catcode`\|=12 - \catcode`\<=12 - \catcode`\>=12 - \catcode`\+=12 - \catcode`\@=12 - \catcode`\\=12} + \scanctxt + \catcode`\ =\active + \catcode`\^^M=\other + \catcode`\\=\active +} +\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces + \scanctxt + \catcode`\{=\other + \catcode`\}=\other +} + % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N % where N is the macro parameter number. % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. - +% {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} } \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} +\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } + \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\macroxxx#1{% - \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist + \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments - \paramno=0% + \paramno=0\relax \else \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% + \if\paramno>256\relax + \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} + \fi + \fi \fi \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% \else \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax - \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi + \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% - % Add the macroname to \macrolist - \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% - \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% + \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% \fi \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody \else \expandafter\parsemacbody \fi} -\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx} -\def\unmacroxxx#1{% +\parseargdef\unmacro{% \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% - % Remove the macro name from \macrolist + % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: \begingroup - \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}% - \def\do##1{% - \def\tempb{##1}% - \ifx\tempa\tempb - % remove this - \else - \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}% - \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}% - \fi}% - \def\newmacrolist{}% - % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist - \macrolist - \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist + \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax + \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo + \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% \endgroup \else \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% \fi } -% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a -% is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by -% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. +% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any +% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. +% +\def\unmacrodo#1{% + \ifx #1\relax + % remove this + \else + \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% + \fi +} + +% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to +% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} -\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} +\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} +% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a +% is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by +% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. -% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist -% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah -% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. +% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. +% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, +% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a +% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params +% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are +% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N +% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be +% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. +% % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). - -% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. -% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something -% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine -% it to # just before using the token list produced. % -% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before -% the macro is used. - -\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% - \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} +% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see +% \parsemmanyargdef. +% +\def\parsemargdef#1;{% + \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% + \let\hash\relax + % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions + \let\xeatspaces\relax + \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% + \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else + \paramno0\relax + \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments + \fi +} \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% \if#1;\let\next=\relax \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx - \advance\paramno by 1% + \advance\paramno by 1 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% \fi\next} -% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. -% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) +% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody +% +% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since +% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) +% +% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro +% body to be transformed. +% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. +% +{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% +\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% +{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% +\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% -\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% -{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% -\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% -{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% +% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. +\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} +\catcode `@=11\relax -% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and -% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. -% Much magic with \expandafter here. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the +% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is +% processed again to replace the arguments. +% +% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the +% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of +% the catcode regime under which the body was input). +% +% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more +% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). +% +% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments +% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to +% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list +% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments +% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining +% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. +\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% + \if#1;\let\next=\relax + \else + \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ + \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa + \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% + % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we + % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an + % \xdef . + \expandafter\edef\tempa + {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% + \advance\paramno by 1\relax + \fi\next} + + +\let\endargs@\relax +\let\nil@\relax +\def\nilm@{\nil@}% +\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% + +% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its +% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros +% macarg.ARGNAME +% +% #1 is the macro name +% #2 is the list of argument names +% #3 is the list of argument values +\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% + \def\macargdeflist@{}% + \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. + \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% + \def\macroname{#1}% + \begingroup + \macroargctxt + \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% + \def\@tempa{#3}% + \ifx\@tempa\empty + \setemptyargvalues@ + \else + \getargvals@@ + \fi +} +\def\getargvals@@{% + \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ + % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. + \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% + \fi + \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ + \else + \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ + % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg + % macros to empty. + \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ + \else + % pop current arg name into \@tempb + \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% + \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% + % pop current argument value into \@tempc + \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% + \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% + % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. + % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd + \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% + \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% + \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% + \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% + \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ + \let\next\getargvals@@ + \fi + \fi + \next +} + +\def\push@#1#2{% + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% + \expandafter#1#2}% +} + +% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result +% in macro \@tempa. +% +\def\macvalstoargs@{% + % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed + % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument + % values into respective token registers. + % + % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. + \begingroup + \paramno0\relax + % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument + % value into a new token list register \toks#N + \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% + % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their + % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they + % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . + \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% + % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers + % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after + % group. + \expandafter + \endgroup + \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% + } + +% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. +% +\def\macargexpandinbody@{% + \expandafter + \endgroup + \macargdeflist@ + % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result + % is in \@tempa . + \macvalstoargs@ + % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value + % with \@tempb . + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname + % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing + % \egroup . + \ifx\@tempb\gobble + \let\@tempc\relax + \else + \let\@tempc\egroup + \fi + % And now we do the real job: + \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% + \@tempd +} + +\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% + \if#1;\let\next\relax + \else + \let\next\putargsintokens@ + % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary + % alias \@tempb . + \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno + % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname + \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% + \advance\paramno by 1\relax + \fi + \next +} + +% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. +% +\def\setemptyargvalues@{% + \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ + \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ + \else + \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ + \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ + \fi + \next +} + +\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% + \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% + \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ + \def\paramlist{#2}% +} + +% #1 is the element target macro +% #2 is the list macro +% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value +\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% + \def#1{#3}% + \def#2{#4}% +} +\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% + \long\def#1{#3}% + \long\def#2{#4}% +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. +% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for +% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". +% \paramno is the number of parameters +% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," +% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file -% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. +% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. +% \def\defmacro{% \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars - \ifrecursive - \ifcase\paramno - % 0 - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% - \or % 1 - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt - \noexpand\braceorline - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% - \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% - \else % many - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt - \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% - \expandafter\expandafter - \expandafter\xdef - \expandafter\expandafter - \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname - \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% - \fi + \ifnum\paramno=1 + \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% + % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't + % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost + % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based + % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. \else - \ifcase\paramno - % 0 + \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion + \fi + \ifcase\paramno + % 0 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% + \or % 1 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \bgroup + \noexpand\braceorline + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% + \egroup + \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% + }% + \else % at most 9 + \ifnum\paramno<10\relax + % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument + % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a + % comma. + % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. + % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% - \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% - \or % 1 - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt - \noexpand\braceorline - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% - \egroup - \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% - \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% - \else % many - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% - \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% + \bgroup + \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the + \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. + \noexpand\expandafter + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% + \noexpand\passargtomacro + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% \expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\xdef \expandafter\expandafter - \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname - \paramlist{% - \egroup - \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% - \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% + \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% + \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% + \else % 10 or more: + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% + }% + \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody + \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble \fi \fi} +\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes + \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} -% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a -% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole -% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence -% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) -\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} -\def\braceorlinexxx{% - \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else - \expandafter\parsearg - \fi \next} -% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not -% expanded by \write. -\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% - \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape +@catcode`@_=11 % private names +@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator +% \passargtomacro#1#2 - +% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 +% compressed to one. +% +% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use +% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where +% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to +% an auxiliary file for an index entry). +% +% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to +% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is +% +% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) +% +% where: +% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call +% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro +% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing +% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next +@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% + @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% +} +@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax + +% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT +% #2 - PENDING_BS +% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN +% #4 used to look ahead +% +% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; +% otherwise, remove the next token. +@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% + @ifx#4\% + @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish + @else + @expandafter@add_segment + @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% +} + +% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT +% #2 - PENDING_BS +% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN +% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. +% #5 looks ahead +% +% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. +@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% + @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% +} + +@gdef@is_fi{@fi} + +% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT +% #2 - PENDING_BS +% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN +% #4 is input stream until next backslash +% +% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a +% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. +% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, +% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until +% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent +% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been +% added to ARG_RESULT. +@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% +@ifx#3@_finish + @call_the_macro#1!% +@else + % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment + @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi + % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. + % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how + % long #4 is. +} + +% #1 - THE_MACRO +% #2 - ARG_RESULT +% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the +% conditional. +@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} + +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks +% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context +% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, +% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular +% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. +% +\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} +\def\braceorlinexxx{% + \ifx\nchar\bgroup + \macroargctxt + \expandafter\passargtomacro + \else + \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg + \fi \macnamexxx} + + % @alias. % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal -% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. -\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx} +% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. +% +\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} -\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces -\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=% - \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}% -\expandafter\endgroup\next} +\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% + {% + \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty + \addtomacrolist{#1}% + \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% + }% + \next +} \message{cross references,} -% @xref etc. \newwrite\auxfile - \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. % @inforef is relatively simple. \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} -\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, +\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% + \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} -% @node's job is to define \lastnode. -\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} -\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} -\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} +% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in +% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and +% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: +% @node foo , bar , ... +% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. +% +\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} +% +% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: +% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs +\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} +\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} + \let\nwnode=\node -\let\lastnode=\relax +\let\lastnode=\empty -% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these. -\def\donoderef{% - \ifx\lastnode\relax\else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% - {Ysectionnumberandtype}% - \global\let\lastnode=\relax +% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the +% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). +% +\def\donoderef#1{% + \ifx\lastnode\empty\else + \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% + \global\let\lastnode=\empty \fi } -\def\unnumbnoderef{% - \ifx\lastnode\relax\else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% - \global\let\lastnode=\relax - \fi -} -\def\appendixnoderef{% - \ifx\lastnode\relax\else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% - {Yappendixletterandtype}% - \global\let\lastnode=\relax - \fi -} - % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. % \newcount\savesfregister -\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} -\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} -\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} +% +\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} +\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} +\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} -% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely -% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have -% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title -% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the -% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do. +% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an +% anchor), which consists of three parts: +% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, +% or the anchor name. +% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or +% empty for anchors. +% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. % -\def\setref#1#2{{% - \indexdummies +% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of +% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: +% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. +% +\def\setref#1#2{% \pdfmkdest{#1}% - \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% - \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% - \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}% -}} + \iflinks + {% + \requireauxfile + \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them + % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. + \def\value##1{##1}% + \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% + \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef + ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef + }% + \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% + \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% + \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. + \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout + }% + \fi +} +% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used +% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. +% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title +% variable, now it's official. +% +\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\onword + \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname + = \empty + \else\ifx\temp\offword + \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname + = \relax + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', + must be on|off}% + \fi\fi +} + +% % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. % -\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} -\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} -\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} +\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} +\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} +\def\ref{\xrefXX} + +\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} +\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} +% +\newbox\toprefbox +\newbox\printedrefnamebox +\newbox\infofilenamebox +\newbox\printedmanualbox +% \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup \unsepspaces + % + % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% + \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% + % + \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% + \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% + % \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% - \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% - \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% - \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% - \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt + \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% + % + % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in + % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. + \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt % No printed node name was explicitly given. - \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax - % Use the node name inside the square brackets. - \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax + % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else - % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside - % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. - \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt - % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. - \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside + % the square brackets if we have it. + \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt + % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else \ifhavexrefs - % We know the real title if we have the xref values. - \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% + % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. + \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% \else % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. - \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi% \fi \fi \fi % - % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not - % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will - % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals - % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this - % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it - % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. + % Make link in pdf output. \ifpdf - \leavevmode - \getfilename{#4}% - \ifnum\filenamelength>0 - \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% - goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}% + % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX + {\indexnofonts + \makevalueexpandable + \turnoffactive + % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ + % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in + % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. + \getfilename{#4}% + % + % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing + % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. + \setpdfdestname{#1}% + % + \ifx\pdfdestname\empty + \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets + \fi + % + \leavevmode + \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% + \ifnum\filenamelength>0 + goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% + \else + goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% + \fi + }% + \setcolor{\linkcolor}% + \else + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined \else - \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% - goto name{#1@}% + % For XeTeX + {\indexnofonts + \makevalueexpandable + \turnoffactive + % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ + % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in + % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. + \getfilename{#4}% + % + % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing + % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. + \setpdfdestname{#1}% + % + \ifx\pdfdestname\empty + \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets + \fi + % + \leavevmode + \ifnum\filenamelength>0 + % With default settings, + % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. + % In this case, the replaced destination names of + % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, + % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. + % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), + % this command line option is no longer necessary + % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. + \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A + << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% + \else + \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A + << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% + \fi + }% + \setcolor{\linkcolor}% \fi - \linkcolor \fi + {% + % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to + % include an _ in the xref name, etc. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \def\value##1{##1}% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle + \csname XR#1-title\endcsname + }% % - \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt - \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% + % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" + % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by + % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. + \iffloat\Xthisreftitle + % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, + % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". + \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt + \refx{#1-snt}{}% + \else + \printedrefname + \fi + % + % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append + % "in MANUALNAME". + \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt + \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% + \fi \else - % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the - % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand - % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of - % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the - % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. - {\normalturnoffactive - % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for - % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. - \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% - \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi - }% - % [mynode], - [\printednodename],\space - % page 3 - \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% + % node/anchor (non-float) references. + % + % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert + % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not + % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals + % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, + % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name + % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. + % + \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt + % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. + % + \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% + % + \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt + % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no + % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as + % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. + % + \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% + % + \else + % Reference within this manual. + % + % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the + % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand + % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of + % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the + % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. + {\turnoffactive + % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for + % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. + \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% + \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi + }% + % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. + \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname + % + % But we always want a comma and a space: + ,\space + % + % output the `page 3'. + \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% + % Add a , if xref followed by a space + \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% + \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB + \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* + \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE + \else\ifx\ + \tokenafterxref ,% @NL + \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \fi\fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} -% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros - -% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore -% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.) -\def\dosetq#1#2{% - {\let\folio=0% - \normalturnoffactive - \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% - \iflinks - \next - \fi - }% +% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). +% +% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither +% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply +% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. +% +% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the +% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in +% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less +% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., +% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. +% +% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every +% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. +% +\def\crossmanualxref#1{% + \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% + \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% + \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? + \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? + \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space + \fi + \fi + #1% } -% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into -% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} -% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character +% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref +% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, +% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly +% one that Bob is working on :). +% +\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} -\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} - -% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq - -\def\Ypagenumber{\folio} - -\def\Ytitle{\thissection} - +% Things referred to by \setref. +% \def\Ynothing{} +\def\Yomitfromtoc{} +\def\Ynumbered{% + \ifnum\secno=0 + \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno + \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno + \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno + \else + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno + \fi\fi\fi +} +\def\Yappendix{% + \ifnum\secno=0 + \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% + \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 + \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno + \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 + \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno + \else + \putwordSection@tie + @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno + \fi\fi\fi +} -\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% -\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % -\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % -\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % -\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % -\else % -\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % -\fi \fi \fi } - -\def\Yappendixletterandtype{% -\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% -\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % -\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % -\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % -\else % -\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % -\fi \fi \fi } - -\gdef\xreftie{'tie} - -% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error -% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. -% -\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined - \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. -\else - \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} -\fi - -% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. -% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. - +% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX +% is output afterwards if non-empty. \def\refx#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax + \requireauxfile + {% + \indexnofonts + \otherbackslash + \def\value##1{##1}% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX + \csname XR#1\endcsname + }% + \ifx\thisrefX\relax % If not defined, say something at least. \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright \iflinks \ifhavexrefs - \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% + {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value + \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% \else \ifwarnedxrefs\else \global\warnedxrefstrue @@ -5558,22 +9147,78 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \fi \else % It's defined, so just use it. - \csname X#1\endcsname + \thisrefX \fi #2% Output the suffix in any case. } -% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. +% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control +% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence +% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float +% type, we have more work to do. % -\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup - % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument. - \catcode`\\ = 0 - \afterassignment\endgroup - \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname +\def\xrdef#1#2{% + {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. + % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands + % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \def\value##1{##1}% + \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% + }% + % + \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref + % + % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? + \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname + % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. + \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist + \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname + % + % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? + \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax + \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do + \else + % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. + \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% + \fi + % + % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, + % for later use in \listoffloats. + \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 + {\safexrefname}}% + \fi } +% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to +% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. +% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. +% +\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. +\let\novalidate = \linksfalse + +% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. +\def\requireauxfile{% + \iflinks + \tryauxfile + % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. + \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux + \fi + \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. +} + % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. -\def\readauxfile{\begingroup +% +\def\tryauxfile{% + \openin 1 \jobname.aux + \ifeof 1 \else + \readdatafile{aux}% + \global\havexrefstrue + \fi + \closein 1 +} + +\def\setupdatafile{% \catcode`\^^@=\other \catcode`\^^A=\other \catcode`\^^B=\other @@ -5601,9 +9246,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \catcode`\^^]=\other \catcode`\^^^=\other \catcode`\^^_=\other - \catcode`\@=\other - \catcode`\^=\other - % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. + % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ @@ -5616,6 +9259,9 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. % + \catcode`\^=\other + % + % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\[=\other \catcode`\]=\other @@ -5627,41 +9273,33 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi \catcode`\$=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\&=\other - \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off - % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters - {% - \count 1=128 - \def\loop{% - \catcode\count 1=\other - \advance\count 1 by 1 - \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi - }% - }% - % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). - % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on - % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. - % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ - % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, - % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. - \catcode`\{=1 - \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\%=\other - \catcode`\'=0 + \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off + % + % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ + % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than + % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ + % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* + % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that + % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for + % now. --karl, 15jan04. \catcode`\\=\other % - \openin 1 \jobname.aux - \ifeof 1 \else - \closein 1 - \input \jobname.aux - \global\havexrefstrue - \global\warnedobstrue - \fi - % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. - \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux + % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. + \catcode`\{=1 + \catcode`\}=2 + \catcode`\@=0 +} + +\def\readdatafile#1{% +\begingroup + \setupdatafile + \input\jobname.#1 \endgroup} -% Footnotes. +\message{insertions,} +% including footnotes. \newcount \footnoteno @@ -5672,11 +9310,9 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } -% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. +% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. \let\footnotestyle=\comment -\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote - {\catcode `\@=11 % % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. @@ -5687,25 +9323,32 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. \let\@sf\empty - \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi + \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi % % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. \unskip \thisfootno\@sf - \footnotezzz + \dofootnote }% % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. % -% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses -% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when +% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses +% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. % -\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup +\gdef\dofootnote{% + \insert\footins\bgroup + % + % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot + % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) + \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest + % % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. % So reset some parameters. + \hsize=\txipagewidth \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox @@ -5718,77 +9361,99 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % \smallfonts \rm % - % Hang the footnote text off the number. - \hang + % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears + % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use + % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote + % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). + \let\noindent = \relax + % + % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the + % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. + \everypar = {\hang}% \textindent{\thisfootno}% % % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. \footstrut + % + % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. \futurelet\next\fo@t } -\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t - \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} -\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} -\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} -\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup} - }%end \catcode `\@=11 -% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size -% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers -% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. +\def\errfootnotenest{% + \errhelp=\EMsimple + \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, + even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} +} + +\def\errfootnoteheading{% + \errhelp=\EMsimple + \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} +} + +% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create +% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion +% would be lost. +% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote +% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. +% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. % -\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} -\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} -\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} +% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. +% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled +% out prematurely. % -\def\setleading#1{% - \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax - \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip - \normalbaselines - \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% - \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip - depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip - }% +\def\startsavinginserts{% + \ifx \insert\ptexinsert + \let\insert\saveinsert + \else + \let\checkinserts\relax + \fi } -% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should -% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the -% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would -% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main -% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). +% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and +% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. % -\def\|{% - % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. - \leavevmode - % - % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. - \vadjust{% - % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current - % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. - \vskip-\baselineskip - % - % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So - % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. - \llap{% - % - % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. - \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt - % - % This is the space between the bar and the text. - \hskip 12pt - }% - }% +\def\saveinsert#1{% + \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% + \afterassignment\next + % swallow the left brace + \let\temp = } +\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} +\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} -% For a final copy, take out the rectangles -% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided -% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). -% -\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} +\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} +\def\placesaveins#1{% + \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname + {\box#1}% +} + +% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: +{ + \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) + \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} +} + +% initialization: +\def\newsaveins #1{% + \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% + \next +} +\def\newsaveinsX #1{% + \csname newbox\endcsname #1% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts + \checksaveins #1}% +} + +% initialize: +\let\checkinserts\empty +\newsaveins\footins +\newsaveins\margin + + % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. % @@ -5797,12 +9462,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi % undone and the next image would fail. \openin 1 = epsf.tex \ifeof 1 \else - \closein 1 - % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in - % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan). + % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in + % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% \input epsf.tex \fi +\closein 1 % % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. \newif\ifwarnednoepsf @@ -5811,84 +9476,1788 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} % \def\image#1{% - \ifx\epsfbox\undefined + \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined \ifwarnednoepsf \else \errhelp = \noepsfhelp \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% \global\warnednoepsftrue \fi \else - \imagexxx #1,,,\finish + \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish \fi } % % Arguments to @image: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. -% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. -\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% +% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. +% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. +% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. +\newif\ifimagevmode +\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup + \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example + \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names + \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro + % If the image is by itself, center it. + \ifvmode + \imagevmodetrue + \else \ifx\centersub\centerV + % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space + \imagevmodetrue + \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev + \fi\fi + % + \ifimagevmode + \nobreak\medskip + % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert + % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space + % above and below. + \nobreak\vskip\parskip + \nobreak + \fi + % + % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing + % environment such as @quotation is respected. + % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the + % normal paragraph indentation. + % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't + % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and + % eradicate the centering. + \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi + % + % Output the image. \ifpdf - \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}% + % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 + \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% \else - % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. - \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi - \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi - \begingroup - \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example - % If the image is by itself, center it. - \ifvmode - \nobreak\bigskip - % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert - % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space - % above and below. - \nobreak\vskip\parskip - \nobreak - \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}% - \bigbreak - \else - % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space. - \epsfbox{#1.eps}% + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + % For epsf.tex + % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi + \epsfbox{#1.eps}% + \else + % For XeTeX + \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \fi + \fi + % + \ifimagevmode + \medskip % space after a standalone image + \fi + \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi +\endgroup} + + +% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, +% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the +% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. +% +\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} + +% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. +\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} + +% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically +% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, +% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. +% +% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to +% be referable. +% +% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It +% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). +% +% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each +% chapter-level command. +\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty +% +\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% + \let\thiscaption=\empty + \let\thisshortcaption=\empty + % + % don't lose footnotes inside @float. + % + % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an + % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 + % + \startsavinginserts + % + % We can't be used inside a paragraph. + \par + % + \vtop\bgroup + \def\floattype{#1}% + \def\floatlabel{#2}% + \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. + % + \ifx\floattype\empty + \let\safefloattype=\empty + \else + {% + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% + }% + \fi + % + % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, + % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) + % + \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname + \global\advance\floatno by 1 + % + {% + % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the + % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float + % labels (which have a completely different output format) from + % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the + % lists of floats. + % + \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% + \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% + }% + \fi + % + % start with \parskip glue, I guess. + \vskip\parskip + % + % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. + \restorefirstparagraphindent +} + +% we have these possibilities: +% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap +% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 +% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap +% @float Foo & no caption: Foo +% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap +% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 +% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap +% @float & no caption: +% +\def\Efloat{% + \let\floatident = \empty + % + % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. + \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi + % + % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. + \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% \fi + % the number. + \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% + \fi + % + % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in + % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. + \let\captionline = \floatident + % + \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else + \ifx\floatident\empty \else + \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between + \fi + % + % caption text. + \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% + \fi + % + % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. + % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. + \ifx\captionline\empty \else + \vskip.5\parskip + \captionline + % + % Space below caption. + \vskip\parskip + \fi + % + % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this + % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as + % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short + % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. + {% + \requireauxfile + \atdummies + % + \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty + \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% + \else + \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% + \fi + \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident + \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% + }% + \fi + \egroup % end of \vtop + % + \checkinserts +} + +% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. +% +\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% + \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% +} + +% @caption, @shortcaption +% +\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} +\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} +\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} +\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} + +% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are +% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. +\def\getfloatno#1{% + \ifx#1\relax + % Haven't seen this figure type before. + \csname newcount\endcsname #1% + % + % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. + \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos + \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% + \fi + \let\floatno#1% +} + +% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref +% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we +% first read the @float command. +% +\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% + +% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can +% distinguish floats from other xref types. +\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} + +% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional +% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic +% \lastsection value which we \setref above. +% +\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} +% +% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the +% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. +% +\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \def\iffloattype{#2}% + \ifx\temp\floatmagic +} + +% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. +% +\parseargdef\listoffloats{% + \def\floattype{#1}% floattype + {% + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% + }% + % + % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. + \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax + \ifhavexrefs + % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. + \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% + \fi + \else + \begingroup + \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc + \let\do=\listoffloatsdo + \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \endgroup \fi } +% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the +% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the +% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which +% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. +% +% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since +% they won't appear in the aux file). +% +\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} +\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% + % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just + % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the + % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link + % in pdf output. + \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% + % + % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. + \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% + \writeentry +}} + \message{localization,} -% and i18n. -% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after -% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything -% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. -% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. +% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very +% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language +% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. % -\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage} -\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{% +{ + \catcode`\_ = \active + \globaldefs=1 +\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. - % Read the file if it exists. + % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. + \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test + \openin 1 txi-#1.tex + \ifeof 1 + \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish + \else + \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist + \input txi-#1.tex + \fi + \closein 1 + \endgroup % end raw TeX +} +% +% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, +% try txi-de.tex. +% +\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% \openin 1 txi-#1.tex - \ifeof1 + \ifeof 1 \errhelp = \nolanghelp \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% - \let\temp = \relax \else - \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }% + \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist + \input txi-#1.tex \fi - \temp - \endgroup + \closein 1 } +}% end of special _ catcode +% \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or -is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory -should work if nowhere else does.} +is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current +directory should work if nowhere else does.} +% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the +% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and +% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. +% +% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. +% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., +% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. +% +% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all +% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in +% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the +% accented characters problem.) +% +\catcode`@=11 +\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% + % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. + \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax + \message{no patterns for #1}% + \else + \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname + \fi + % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. + \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax + \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax +} -% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most -% likely, but for now just recognize it. -\let\documentencoding = \comment +% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. +% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. +% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. +% +\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable +\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio +\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined + \txinativeunicodecapablefalse + \txiusebytewiseiotrue + \else + \txinativeunicodecapabletrue + \txiusebytewiseiofalse + \fi +\else + \txinativeunicodecapabletrue + \txiusebytewiseiofalse +\fi -% Page size parameters. +% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex +% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. % +\def\setbytewiseio{% + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \else + \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read + \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file + % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for + % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. + % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in + % place of non-ASCII characters. + \fi + + \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined + \else + \directlua{ + local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub + local function convert_char (char) + return utf8_char(byte(char)) + end + + local function convert_line (line) + return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) + end + + callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) + + local function convert_line_out (line) + local line_out = "" + for c in string.utfvalues(line) do + line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) + end + return line_out + end + + callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) + } + \fi + + \txiusebytewiseiotrue +} + + +% Helpers for encodings. +% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. +% +\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% + \count255=128 + \loop\ifnum\count255<256 + \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax + \advance\count255 by 1 + \repeat +} + +\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% + \count255=128 + \loop\ifnum\count255<256 + \catcode\count255=#1\relax + \advance\count255 by 1 + \repeat +} + +% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters +% according to the specified encoding. +% +\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} +\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% + % + % Encoding being declared for the document. + \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% + % + % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able + % to compare them with \ifx. + \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% + \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% + \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% + \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% + \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% + % + \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii + \asciichardefs + % + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo + \iftxinativeunicodecapable + \setbytewiseio + \fi + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active + \lattwochardefs + % + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone + \iftxinativeunicodecapable + \setbytewiseio + \fi + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active + \latonechardefs + % + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine + \iftxinativeunicodecapable + \setbytewiseio + \fi + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active + \latninechardefs + % + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight + \iftxinativeunicodecapable + % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) + \nativeunicodechardefs + \else + % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active + % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level + % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated + % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is + % sufficient. + \fi + % + \else + \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% + % + \fi % utfeight + \fi % latnine + \fi % latone + \fi % lattwo + \fi % ascii + % + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \else + \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight + \else + \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii + \else + \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % + non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% + \fi + \fi + \fi +} + +% emacs-page +% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available +% the default font encoding (OT1). +% +\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} + +% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. +\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} + +% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be +% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of +% macros containing the character definitions. +\setnonasciicharscatcode\active +% + +\def\gdefchar#1#2{% +\gdef#1{% + \ifpassthroughchars + \string#1% + \else + #2% + \fi +}} + +% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. +\def\latonechardefs{% + \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} + \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} + \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent + \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds} + \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency + \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen + \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar + \gdefchar^^a7{\S} + \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} + \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright} + \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} + \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft} + \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} + \gdefchar^^ad{\-} + \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol} + \gdefchar^^af{\={}} + % + \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} + \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} + \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} + \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} + \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} + \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} + \gdefchar^^b6{\P} + \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} + \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } + \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} + \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} + \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright} + \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} + \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} + \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} + \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} + % + \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} + \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} + \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} + \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} + \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} + \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} + \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} + \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} + \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} + \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} + \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} + \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} + \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} + \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} + \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} + \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} + % + \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} + \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} + \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} + \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} + \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} + \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} + \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} + \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} + \gdefchar^^d8{\O} + \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} + \gdefchar^^da{\'U} + \gdefchar^^db{\^U} + \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} + \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} + \gdefchar^^de{\TH} + \gdefchar^^df{\ss} + % + \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} + \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} + \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} + \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} + \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} + \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} + \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} + \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} + \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} + \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} + \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} + \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} + \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} + \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} + \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} + \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} + % + \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} + \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} + \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} + \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} + \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} + \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} + \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} + \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} + \gdefchar^^f8{\o} + \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} + \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} + \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} + \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} + \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} + \gdefchar^^fe{\th} + \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} +} + +% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. +\def\latninechardefs{% + % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. + \latonechardefs + % + \gdefchar^^a4{\euro} + \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} + \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} + \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} + \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} + \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} + \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} + \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} +} + +% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. +\def\lattwochardefs{% + \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} + \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} + \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} + \gdefchar^^a3{\L} + \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} + \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} + \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} + \gdefchar^^a7{\S} + \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} + \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} + \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} + \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} + \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} + \gdefchar^^ad{\-} + \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} + \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} + % + \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} + \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} + \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} + \gdefchar^^b3{\l} + \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} + \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} + \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} + \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} + \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } + \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} + \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} + \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} + \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} + \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} + \gdefchar^^be{\v z} + \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} + % + \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} + \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} + \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} + \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} + \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} + \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} + \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} + \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} + \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} + \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} + \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} + \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} + \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} + \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} + \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} + \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} + % + \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} + \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} + \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} + \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} + \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} + \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} + \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} + \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} + \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} + \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} + \gdefchar^^da{\'U} + \gdefchar^^db{\H U} + \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} + \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} + \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} + \gdefchar^^df{\ss} + % + \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} + \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} + \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} + \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} + \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} + \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} + \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} + \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} + \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} + \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} + \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} + \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} + \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} + \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} + \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} + \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} + % + \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} + \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} + \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} + \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} + \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} + \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} + \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} + \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} + \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} + \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} + \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} + \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} + \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} + \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} + \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} + \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} +} + +% UTF-8 character definitions. +% +% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some +% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by +% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. +% +\newcount\countUTFx +\newcount\countUTFy +\newcount\countUTFz + +\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} +% +\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} +% +\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} + +\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% + \ifx #1\relax + \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% + \else + \expandafter #1% + \fi +} + +% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences +\begingroup + \catcode`\~13 + \catcode`\$12 + \catcode`\"12 + + % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp + % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. + \def\UTFviiiLoop{% + \global\catcode\countUTFx\active + \uccode`\~\countUTFx + \uccode`\$\countUTFx + \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% + \advance\countUTFx by 1 + \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy + \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop + \fi} + + % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to + % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. + \countUTFx = "80 + \countUTFy = "C2 + \def\UTFviiiTmp{% + \gdef~{% + \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% + \UTFviiiLoop + + \countUTFx = "C2 + \countUTFy = "E0 + \def\UTFviiiTmp{% + \gdef~{% + \ifpassthroughchars $% + \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% + \UTFviiiLoop + + \countUTFx = "E0 + \countUTFy = "F0 + \def\UTFviiiTmp{% + \gdef~{% + \ifpassthroughchars $% + \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% + \UTFviiiLoop + + \countUTFx = "F0 + \countUTFy = "F4 + \def\UTFviiiTmp{% + \gdef~{% + \ifpassthroughchars $% + \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi + }}% + \UTFviiiLoop +\endgroup + +\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below + +% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. +\def\U#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax + \iftxinativeunicodecapable + % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is + % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, + % letters are missing. + \begingroup + \uccode`\.="#1\relax + \uppercase{.} + \endgroup + \else + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% + \fi + \else + \csname uni:#1\endcsname + \fi +} + +% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control +% sequence to be defined. +\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% + \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% +\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% + \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% +\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% + \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% + +% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), +% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; +% this gets used by the @U command +% +\begingroup + \catcode`\"=12 + \catcode`\<=12 + \catcode`\.=12 + \catcode`\,=12 + \catcode`\;=12 + \catcode`\!=12 + \catcode`\~=13 + \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% + \countUTFz = "#1\relax + \begingroup + \parseXMLCharref + + % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's + % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. + % + % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 + % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname + % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) + % + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% + % + \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else + \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% + \fi + % + % define an additional control sequence for this code point. + \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp + \endgroup} + % + % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp + % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. + \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% + \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% + \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax + \parseUTFviiiA,% + \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% + \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax + \parseUTFviiiA;% + \parseUTFviiiA,% + \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% + \else + \parseUTFviiiA;% + \parseUTFviiiA,% + \parseUTFviiiA!% + \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% + \fi\fi\fi + } + + % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. + % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. + % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one + % of the bytes. + \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% + \countUTFx = \countUTFz + \divide\countUTFz by 64 + \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. + \multiply\countUTFz by 64 + + % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract + % in order to get the last five bits. + \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz + + % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. + \advance\countUTFx by 128 + \uccode `#1\countUTFx + \countUTFz = \countUTFy} + + % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp + % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 + % sequence. + % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. + % #3 is always a full stop (.) + % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these + % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. + \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% + \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax + \uccode `#3\countUTFz + \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} +\endgroup + +% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), +% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally +% +\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% + \catcode"#1=\other +} + +% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M +% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) +% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) +% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A +% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B +% +% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing +% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts +% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without +% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, +% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. +% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at +% least make most of the characters not bomb out. +% +\def\unicodechardefs{% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% + % + % Greek letters upper case + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% + %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% + % + % Vowels with accents + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% + % + % Standalone accent + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% + % + % Greek letters lower case + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% + % + % More Greek vowels with accents + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% + % + % Variant Greek letters + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% + % + % Punctuation + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}% + % + % Mathematical symbols + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\ensuremath\mho}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BE}{\ensuremath\upharpoonright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21DD}{\ensuremath\leadsto}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2201}{\ensuremath\complement}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228F}{\ensuremath\sqsubset}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2290}{\ensuremath\sqsupset}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B4}{\ensuremath\unlhd}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B5}{\ensuremath\unrhd}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% + % + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25A1}{\ensuremath\Box}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\Diamond}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A1D}{\ensuremath\Join}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% + % + \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% +}% end of \unicodechardefs + +% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) +% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. +\def\utfeightchardefs{% + \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii + \unicodechardefs +} + +% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to +% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to +% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for +% printing the correct glyphs. +\newif\ifpassthroughchars +\passthroughcharsfalse + +% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), +% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character +% +\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% + \catcode"#1=\active + \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% + \begingroup + \uccode`\~="##2\relax + \uppercase{\gdef~}{% + \ifpassthroughchars + ##1% + \else + ##3% + \fi + } + \endgroup + } + \begingroup + \uccode`\.="#1\relax + \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% + \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% + \endgroup +} + +% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. +% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. +\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% + \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative + \unicodechardefs +} + +% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), +% make the character token expand +% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. +\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% + \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} + \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp +} + +% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). +\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% + \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU + \unicodechardefs +} + +% US-ASCII character definitions. +\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done + \relax +} + +% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U. +\iftxinativeunicodecapable + \nativeunicodechardefsatu +\else + \utfeightchardefs +\fi + + +% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with +% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a +% document encoding. +% +\setnonasciicharscatcode \other + + +\message{formatting,} + \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt @@ -5898,10 +11267,10 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. \vbadness = 10000 -% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. -\hbadness = 2000 +% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. +\hbadness = 6666 -% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. +% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. \widowpenalty=10000 \clubpenalty=10000 @@ -5919,11 +11288,14 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} \fi } -% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; -% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can -% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip. +% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; +% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; +% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. % -\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{% +% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define +% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. +% +\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% \voffset = #3\relax \topskip = #6\relax \splittopskip = \topskip @@ -5932,16 +11304,34 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} \advance\vsize by \topskip \outervsize = \vsize \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin - \pageheight = \vsize + \txipageheight = \vsize % \hsize = #2\relax \outerhsize = \hsize \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in - \pagewidth = \hsize + \txipagewidth = \hsize % \normaloffset = #4\relax \bindingoffset = #5\relax % + \ifpdf + \pdfpageheight #7\relax + \pdfpagewidth #8\relax + % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of + % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. + \pdfhorigin = 1 true in + \pdfvorigin = 1 true in + \else + \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined + \else + \pdfpageheight #7\relax + \pdfpagewidth #8\relax + % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. + \fi + \fi + % + \setleading{\textleading} + % \parindent = \defaultparindent \setemergencystretch } @@ -5949,76 +11339,140 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} % @letterpaper (the default). \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt - \setleading{13.2pt}% + \textleading = 13.2pt % % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. - \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}% + \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines + {\voffset}{.25in}% + {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% + {11in}{8.5in}% }} -% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. +% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt - \setleading{12pt}% + \textleading = 12pt % - \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}% + \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% + {-.2in}{0in}% + {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% + {9.25in}{7in}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.3in \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt - \deftypemargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = .5cm +}} + +% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. +% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) +\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt + \textleading = 12pt % - \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx - \let\smallexample = \smalllispx - \let\smallformat = \smallformatx - \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx + \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% + {-.2in}{-.4in}% + {0pt}{14pt}% + {9in}{6in}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.25in + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = .4cm }} % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 - \setleading{12pt}% \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \textleading = 13.2pt % - \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 + % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. + % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust + % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then + % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in + % your texinfo source file like this: + % @tex + % \global\normaloffset = -6mm + % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm + % @end tex + \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines + {\voffset}{\hoffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + {297mm}{210mm}% % \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = 5mm }} -% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin -% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. -\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 - \setleading{13.6pt}% +% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. +% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. +% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. +\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt + \textleading = 12.5pt % + \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% + {\voffset}{\hoffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% + {210mm}{148mm}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.2in + \tolerance = 800 + \hfuzz = 1.2pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = 2mm + \tableindent = 12mm +}} + +% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. +\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper - \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}% + \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% + {\voffset}{4.6mm}% + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% + {297mm}{210mm}% % + % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. \globaldefs = 0 }} -% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. -\def\afourwide{% +% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. +\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper - \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}% - % + \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% + {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% + {297mm}{210mm}% \globaldefs = 0 -} +}} % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. % -\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} -\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} +\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi \globaldefs = 1 % \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt - \setleading{13.2pt}% + \setleading{\textleading}% % - \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + \dimen0 = #1\relax + \advance\dimen0 by \voffset + % + \dimen2 = \hsize + \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset + % + \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% + {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% }} % Set default to letter. @@ -6028,28 +11482,24 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} +\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment + +% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. +\catcode`\^^? = 14 + % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. -\catcode`\"=\other -\catcode`\~=\other -\catcode`\^=\other -\catcode`\_=\other -\catcode`\|=\other -\catcode`\<=\other -\catcode`\>=\other -\catcode`\+=\other -\catcode`\$=\other -\def\normaldoublequote{"} -\def\normaltilde{~} -\def\normalcaret{^} -\def\normalunderscore{_} -\def\normalverticalbar{|} -\def\normalless{<} -\def\normalgreater{>} -\def\normalplus{+} -\def\normaldollar{$} +\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} +\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix +\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} +\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} +\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} +\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} +\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} +\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} +\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} -% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont -% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, +% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt +% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, % where something hairier probably needs to be done. % % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print @@ -6065,134 +11515,209 @@ should work if nowhere else does.} % this is not a problem. \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} -% Turn off all special characters except @ -% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). +% Set catcodes for Texinfo file + +% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. - +% \catcode`\"=\active \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} \let"=\activedoublequote -\catcode`\~=\active -\def~{{\tt\char126}} -\chardef\hat=`\^ -\catcode`\^=\active -\def^{{\tt \hat}} +\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde +\chardef\hatchar=`\^ +\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} -% Subroutine for the previous macro. -\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} +\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } +\let\realunder=_ -\catcode`\|=\active -\def|{{\tt\char124}} +\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} + \chardef \less=`\< -\catcode`\<=\active -\def<{{\tt \less}} +\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless \chardef \gtr=`\> -\catcode`\>=\active -\def>{{\tt \gtr}} -\catcode`\+=\active -\def+{{\tt \char 43}} -\catcode`\$=\active -\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar} -%\catcode 27=\active -%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} +\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr +\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} +\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix +\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash -% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. -{\catcode`\==\active -\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} -\catcode`+=\active -\catcode`\_=\active +% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page +% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. +\def\texinfochars{% + \let< = \activeless + \let> = \activegtr + \let~ = \activetilde + \let^ = \activehat + \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault + \let\b = \strong + \let\i = \smartitalic + % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. +} -% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file -% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. -% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. -% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. -\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} +% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after +% parsing them. +\def\turnoffactive{% + \normalturnoffactive + \otherbackslash +} \catcode`\@=0 -% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font -\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ -%{\catcode`\\=\other -%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} +% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, +% as in \char`\\. +\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ +\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work -% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. -{\catcode`\\=\active -@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} +% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and +% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). +{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} -% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. -\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} +% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash +% in fixed width font. +\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. -% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q -\catcode`\\=\active +% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use +% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char +% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol +% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex +% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, +% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; +% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the +% usual hex value because it has already been made active. -% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters -% even after parsing them. -@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote -@let\=@realbackslash -@let~=@normaltilde -@let^=@normalcaret -@let_=@normalunderscore -@let|=@normalverticalbar -@let<=@normalless -@let>=@normalgreater -@let+=@normalplus -@let$=@normaldollar} +@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} +@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. -@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote -@let\=@normalbackslash -@let~=@normaltilde -@let^=@normalcaret -@let_=@normalunderscore -@let|=@normalverticalbar -@let<=@normalless -@let>=@normalgreater -@let+=@normalplus -@let$=@normaldollar} +% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. +% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with +% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. +@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} +@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} -% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. -% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. -@otherifyactive +% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of +% the literal character `\'. +% +{@catcode`- = @active + @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% + @passthroughcharstrue + @let-=@normaldash + @let"=@normaldoublequote + @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix + @let+=@normalplus + @let<=@normalless + @let>=@normalgreater + @let^=@normalcaret + @let_=@normalunderscore + @let|=@normalverticalbar + @let~=@normaltilde + @let\=@ttbackslash + @markupsetuplqdefault + @markupsetuprqdefault + @unsepspaces + } +} +% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file +% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. +% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. +@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other + +% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' +% % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing % a backslash. -% -@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} -@global@let\ = @eatinput +% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after +% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. +% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. +% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. +{ +@catcode`@^=7 +@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% + @global@let\ = @eatinput% + @catcode`@^^M=13% + @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% + % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. + @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% + % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. + @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% +}} -% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then -% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix -% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. -% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input -% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. -% +{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% +@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} + +% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token +% appears by mistake. +{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% +@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% + @gdef^^M{% + @par% + %@par% +}}} + + @gdef@fixbackslash{% - @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi + @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi + @catcode13=5 % regular end of line + @enableemergencynewline + @let@c=@texinfoc + % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input + % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active + % + % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. + % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets + % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf + % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format + % file for Texinfo. + % + @openin 1 texinfo.cnf + @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi + @closein 1 } + % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. @escapechar = `@@ -% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. -@catcode`@& = @other -@catcode`@# = @other -@catcode`@% = @other +% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need +% active definitions as the normal characters. +@def@normaldot{.} +@def@normalquest{?} +@def@normalslash{/} -@c Set initial fonts. -@textfonts -@rm +% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. +% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. +@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} +@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} +@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} +@let @hashchar = @normalhash +@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and +@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we +@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. +@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. +@catcode`@'=@active +@catcode`@`=@active +@markupsetuplqdefault +@markupsetuprqdefault + @c Local variables: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) -@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" +@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" @c time-stamp-end: "}" @c End: + +@c vim:sw=2: + +@ignore + arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 +@end ignore +@enablebackslashhack